Download maxpro® vms r300 sp1 - Honeywell Integrated Security
Transcript
MAXPRO® Video Management System R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Document 800-20433-A – 02/2015 This page is intentionally left blank. Revisions Issue Date Description 1.0 March 8, 2012 New document 2.0 February, 2015 Updated for R310 Release This page is intentionally left blank. MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents Table of Contents ABOUT THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 INTRODUCING MAXPRO® VMS R310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTENDED AUDIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STRUCTURE OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11 11 12 12 COMMISSIONING PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 STEPS IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SETTING UP THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE IN THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS CONFIGURING THE MAXPRO VMS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 14 15 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TASKS TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 VIRTUAL MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 USEFUL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING THE MONITOR DISPLAY PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABOUT SERIAL EXPANDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENABLING WINDOWS .NET 3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 25 25 27 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 OPERATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 HOW TO INSTALL MAXPRO VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 COMPLETE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 CUSTOM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 SERVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CLIENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 VIDEO ANALYTICS SERVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 AFTER INSTALLING MAXPRO VMS R310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents REMOVING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 AFTER REMOVING MAXPRO VMS R310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 SQL EXPRESS 2012 SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 CLEANING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 MANUAL STEPS IF SQL CONNECTION FAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 FIREWALL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 SERVER SIDE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLIENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ULTRAKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 78 78 79 79 CONFIGURING MAXPRO VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 SETTING UP A SITE USING CONFIGURATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 ADDING SITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING WORKSTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING PARTITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING ROLES AND USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING CONTACT GROUP AND CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING EVENT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING RECORDER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING SERIAL PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING ANALYTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING SWITCHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING VIDEO INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING ALARM INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING LOGICAL CAMERAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING SYSTEM MACROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING INTERCEPT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 84 84 RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ADDING A RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR IP ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 DISCOVERING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 6 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 FILTERING AND GROUPING THE RECORDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 SORTING RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 UPDATING A RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 DELETING A RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 VIDEO INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ADDING VIDEO INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING A CAMERA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A VIDEO INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSOCIATING ANALYTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILTERING AND GROUPING THE VIDEOINPUT(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SORTING VIDEO INPUT(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATING A VIDEO INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELETING A VIDEO INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE (DIGITAL INPUT TRUNK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 119 149 154 155 155 160 161 161 162 162 VIDEO OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ADDING MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (STANDARD DEVICE/SMART DEVICE/VCR/ STANDBY VCR) 169 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (TRUNK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (DIGITAL OUTPUT TRUNK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 DELETING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 UPDATING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 LOCKING THE DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO EVENT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 CONFIGURING JOYSTICK CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTING THE KEYBOARD TO MAXPRO VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING THE SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATING A JOYSTICK CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 175 176 176 177 SWITCHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ADDING A SWITCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATING A SWITCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELETING A SWITCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SWITCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSOCIATING EVENTS TO SWITCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 184 184 185 185 7 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 ADDING THE RELAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 DELETING THE RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 UPDATING THE RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 ALARM INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 DELETING THE ALARM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 UPDATING THE ALARM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 CONTACT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 DELETING THE CONTACT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 UPDATING THE CONTACT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ADDING A CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 ADDING A USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCOVERING AND IMPORTING USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATING A USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELETING A USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 220 221 221 ROLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ADDING A ROLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 UPDATING A ROLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DELETING A ROLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 CREATING A SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 UPDATING A SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DELETING A SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ANALYTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) REPORTING TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) ALARM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) CONFIGURATION TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) FORENSICS TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) LIVE MONITORING STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) USER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDING AN ANALYTICS SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 236 236 237 237 237 237 PARTITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ADDING A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 DELETING A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 WORKSTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ADDING A WORKSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 DELETING A WORKSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ADDING A SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 DELETING A SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 8 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents EVENT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ADDING AN EVENT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 DELETING AN EVENT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 INTERCEPT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ADDING INTERCEPT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 UPDATING INTERCEPT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 DELETING INTERCEPT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 LOGICAL CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ADDING A LOGICAL CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 DELETING A LOGICAL CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 UPDATING LOGICAL CAMERAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 SYSTEM MACROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 ADDING A SYSTEM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 EXECUTING A SYSTEM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 DELETING A SYSTEM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 RECORDER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO RECORDER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSOCIATING RECORDERS FROM THE RECORDER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATING RECORDER GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELETING RECORDER GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 260 260 261 TRINITY CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ADDING A SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 UPDATING A SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 DELETING A SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 USER DEFINED EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 EVENT ASSOCIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 MIGRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 EXPORTING THE FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 IMPORTING THE DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 EQUIP SERIES CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 SCHEDULER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 UPDATING A SCHEDULER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 ADDING JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 ALARM NOTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 SMTP SERVER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 CREATING AN EMAIL TEMPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ACTIVITIES TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 9 MAXPRO VMS R310 Table of Contents CHECKING THE CONNECTION WITH MAXPRO VMS SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN THE DEVICES WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 CHECKING THE LIVE VIDEO FROM CAMERAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 CHECKING THE PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 CHECKING THE BOOKMARK FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 CHECKING THE PLAYBACK LOOP IN THE TIMELINE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 CHECKING THE PANNING, TILTING, AND ZOOMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 CHECKING FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CLEARING OF ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 CHECKING FOR THE CREATION OF IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 CHECKING THE CREATION OF CLIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 CHECKING THE SENDING AND RECEIVING OF OPERATOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 CHECKING THE SURROUNDING CAMERAS FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 CHECKING THE SAVING THE SALVO LAYOUT USING THE SALVO VIEW FEATURE . . . . .318 CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN MY DEVICES WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 CHECKING THE SEARCH FOR RECORDED VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 CHECKING THE GENERATION OF EVENT HISTORY AND OPERATOR LOG REPORT . . . . . .321 UPGRADING TO MAXPRO VMS R310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R300 TO MAXPRO VMS R310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R240 TO MAXPRO VMS R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 10 ABOUT THIS GUIDE ..... ................................... INTRODUCING MAXPRO® VMS R310 ................................................................. MAXPRO® Video Management System R310 (MAXPRO® VMS R310) is an enterpriseclass video management and hybrid solution. It enables you to perform various surveillance operations on traditional analog, network and IP based video equipment in the same surveillance network. You can deploy thousands of cameras in number of locations, and add many video devices such as recorders and monitors. SCOPE ................................................................. This guide helps you in: • Setting up the hardware for the MAXPRO VMS system • Installing and uninstalling the MAXPRO VMS software • Commissioning the MAXPRO VMS system • Verifying the MAXPRO VMS system after the commissioning process • Upgrading from previous versions of MAXPRO VMS to MAXPRO VMS R310. INTENDED AUDIENCE ................................................................. This guide is intended for the field and commissioning engineers of MAXPRO VMS system. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 11 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Structure of this Guide STRUCTURE OF THIS GUIDE ................................................................. The following table describes the contents of each chapter in this guide. No Chapter Description 1 Commissioning Plan Description of the process involved in commissioning the MAXPRO VMS. 2 Setting up the Client and the Server Computers • Hardware specifications for MAXPRO VMS server and client computers. • Procedures for configuring the monitor display properties. • Steps for installing the serial expander. 3 Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software Procedure for installing MAXPRO VMS R310 software. 4 Configuring devices and Setting up a Site Configure the MAXPRO VMS. 5 Verifying the Configuration of MAXPRO VMS Steps to verify the configuration of MAXPRO VMS. 6 Upgrading to MAXPRO VMS R310 Procedures to upgrade from previous versions for MAXPRO VMS to MAXPRO VMS R310. TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS ................................................................. This guide uses the conventions listed in the following table. 12 Font What it represents Example Swiss721 BT Words or characters that you must type. The word “enter” is used if you must type text and then press the Enter or Return key. Enter the password. Menu titles and other items you select Double-click Open from the File menu. Buttons you click to perform actions Click Exit to close the program. Trebuchet MS Heading Installation Swiss721 BT (Bold Italic) Cross-reference to external source Refer to the System Administrator Guide. Swiss721 BT (Italic) Cross-reference within the guide See Installation. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 1 COMMISSIONING PLAN ..... ................................... OVERVIEW ................................................................. Commissioning is the process of installing, configuring, and setting up the MAXPRO VMS hardware and software. At the end of the commissioning process, the MAXPRO VMS system is equipped for use by operators to perform surveillance operations. The steps in the commissioning process must be performed one after the other for successful deployment of MAXPRO VMS system. STEPS IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS ................................................................. The process of commissioning consists of the following phases: • • • • Setting up the Server and Client Computers. Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software in the Server and Client Computers. Configuring the MAXPRO VMS System. Verifying the Configuration. SETTING UP THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS Setting up the server and client computers involve: • Determining the number of server and client computers at the location and ensuring that they meet the minimum hardware requirements such as processor type and memory size. • to the computers after ensuring that they meet the hardware requirements. You can connect up to four monitors to each computer. After , configure the monitor display properties. • Installing the serial expander, if switchers, serial keyboards (Ultrakey), Protocol Interface Translators (PIT), and other serial devices are used at the location. Note: See the chapter Setting up the Client and the Server Computers for information on hardware requirements, how to connect the monitors to the computers, how to configure the display properties, and how to install the serial expander. INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE IN THE SERVER AND CLIENT COMPUTERS Installing the software involves: MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 13 1 COMMISSIONING PLAN Steps in the Commissioning Process • Ensuring that the server and client computers meet the minimum software requirements such as operating system and anti virus software. • Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 software. Note: See the chapter Installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software for information on software requirements and installation instructions for the MAXPRO VMS R310 software. CONFIGURING THE MAXPRO VMS SYSTEM In this phase, you need to configure the MAXPRO VMS through the user interface. Before you start configuring, perform the following: • Determine the number of sites to add in the MAXPRO VMS system. A default site is available in MAXPRO VMS. Typically, a site is a geographical group of cameras or similar cameras and can be used to logically group cameras. • Determine the number of partitions and event groups to be created for each site. A default global partition is automatically created when you add a site in MAXPRO VMS. Partitions and event groups are used to limit access to cameras and events. • Ensure that the recorders and other video devices such as cameras and streamers are powered on and connected to the network. • Determine the IP addresses of the recorders and streamers. The IP addresses are required to add the devices to the MAXPRO VMS system. • Determine to which site each recorder, camera, monitor, and switcher needs to be associated. • Determine to which event group and partition each recorder, camera, switcher, and monitor needs to be associated. • Determine the roles of users for each site. You need to create roles and define privileges for them while configuring the MAXPRO VMS system. • Determine the number of users for each site. You need to create users and associate them to roles while configuring the MAXPRO VMS system. MAXPRO can also use Windows System users discoverable through Active directory • Determine which partitions, event groups, client workstations, and joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboard) each user can access. Note: 14 See the chapter Configuring devices and Setting up a Site for information on how to configure the MAXPRO VMS system. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . COMMISSIONING PLAN Steps in the Commissioning Process VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION • Verifying the configuration involves checking whether the surveillance operations can be performed using MAXPRO VMS software. Surveillance operations include, viewing the live video, performing the pan, tilt, and zoom on the video, and starting the video recording. Note: See the chapter Verifying the Configuration of MAXPRO VMS for information on how to perform the verification. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 15 1 COMMISSIONING PLAN Steps in the Commissioning Process This page is intentionally left blank 16 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS ..... ................................... OVERVIEW ................................................................. Setting up the server and client computers is the first phase in the commissioning process. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Determine the following at the location: • Number of server and client computers • Hardware configuration of the computers • Number of serial devices such as joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboard), switchers, PITs, and other devices TASKS TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE The following table lists the activities that are performed in this phase. Tasks See the section... Specifications for virtual server solution Virtual Machine Specifications Ensure that the hardware configuration of the server and client computers meet the minimum specifications. Hardware Specifications Connect the monitors, keyboard, and mouse to the server and client computers. Configuring the Monitor Display Properties Configure the monitor display properties. Configuring the Monitor Display Properties. Install the serial expander in the server to connect serial devices. About Serial Expander MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 17 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Virtual Machine Specifications VIRTUAL MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. If you choose to provide your own virtual server solution for use with Honeywell MAXPRO VMS R310 VMS software, the solution must meet or exceed the specifications listed in the following table. Specification Description Minimum Processors Speed 3GHz, Sockets 1, Cores per socket 2 Memory 8 GB Storage Two separate Disk/LUN datastores on a local SCSI, Fibre Channel or iSCSI Provisioned Thick “Eagerzeroed” preferred. Dedicated Datastore 1 sized 120GB or larger is for the Windows operating system, MAXPRO VMS server software and Microsoft SQL server software. Dedicated Datastore 2 sized 120GB or larger is for the Microsoft SQL Server database files Networking One or more active VM Network adapters 1000Mb, Full Duplex (vmxnet 3 preferred) Video Card Virtual Machine Video Card set to one display with 128MB total video memory Operating System For the VMware session install Windows Server 2008R2 or 2012 Standard Edition R2 Note: You are responsible for the setup of the VMware ESXi host, the Virtual Machine configuration options, operating system software, physical and virtual networking configuration and all other customer IT requirements. Microsoft Windows Server 2008SE R2 SP1 or 2012 Standard Edition must be installed per the Honeywell installation instructions included on the MAXPRO VMS installation DVDs. Caution: You own the full responsibility for the virtual solution, computer hardware and operating system compatibility. Honeywell is only responsible for the MAXPRO VMS software application and Honeywellinstalled subsystem components. VMware ESXi qualification is for the MAXPRO VMS server only. The MAXPRO VMS client is not supported in a virtual environment. 18 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Virtual Machine Specifications USEFUL TIPS Here are some of the tips that help in setting up the virtual machine environment. • • • • • MAXPRO VMS includes SQL Server 2012 R2 Express (based on prerequisites) as default and supports SQL Server 2012 R2 The end customer has to provide, install, and maintain updates to McAfee or Symantec Antivirus Software. Turn off the Microsoft automatic updates option. Always perform a full system backup prior to applying any of the tested Microsoft hot fixes. Follow the VMware ESXi best practices for configuring ESXi hosts and minimize SCSI Reservation delays. To support 64-bit virtual machines, support for hardware virtualization (Intel VT-x) must be enabled on x64 CPUs on the Physical ESXi Host Server. Place the management network and virtual machine networks on different physical network cards. Dedicated Gigabit Ethernet cards for virtual machines, such as Intel PRO 1000 adapters, improve throughput to virtual machines with high network traffic. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 19 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. The MAXPRO VMS server and client computers must meet the minimum hardware specifications. This is necessary for proper and efficient working of the MAXPRO VMS. There are two types of hardware configurations for the server and client namely, standard and performance. The standard configuration uses the minimum hardware specifications. The performance configuration uses higher hardware specifications for better performance. The performance configuration is also recommended for compatibility with features that are going to be provided in MAXPRO VMS in the near future. Table 2-1 MAXPRO VMS Server (Standard Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit, Windows 2012 up to 5 Clients) Specification Description Processor Single Intel® Quad Core Xeon E3 1224V3 3.2 GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® Server 2008 R2 and 2012 32&64 bit Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Server - dual power supply suggested Recommended System Memory (RAM) 8 GB DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD +/- RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk / RAID set 1 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for Windows operating system, MAXPRO VMS Server Software, and Microsoft SQL Server software. Disk / RAID set 2 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files. Note: If fault tolerance is required, RAID set 1 is RAID 1, 10 or 0+1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 + 1. Multiple Monitor Card -Display Adapter (Video Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels; 32-bit color or higher. Resolution) 20 Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI-e serial RS232 Network Connection 1Gbit/sec or greater MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2-2 MAXPRO VMS Server (Performance Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit, Windows 2012 up to 10 Clients) Specification Description Processor Single Intel® 6 Core Xeon E5 2630V2 2.6GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® Server 2008 R2 and 2012 32&64 bit Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Server - dual power supply suggested Recommended System Memory (RAM) 16GB DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD +/- RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk / RAID set 1 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for Windows operating system, MAXPRO VMS Server Software, and Microsoft SQL Server software. Disk / RAID set 2 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files. Note: If fault tolerance is required, RAID set 1 is RAID 1, 10 or 0+1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 + 1. Multiple Monitor Card -Display Adapter (Video Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels; 32-bit color or higher Resolution) Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI-e serial RS232 Network Connection 1Gbit/sec or greater. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 21 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2-3 MAXPRO VMS Server (Performance Spec with Windows 2008 Server R2 64 bit, Windows 2012 up to 25 Clients) Specification Description Processor Dual Intel® 6 Core Xeon’s E5 2630V2 2.6GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® Server 2008 R2 and 2012 32&64 bit Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Server - dual power supply suggested Recommended System Memory (RAM) 16GB DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD +/- RW Disk Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays Disk / RAID set 1 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for Windows operating system, MAXPRO VMS Server Software, and Microsoft SQL Server software. Disk / RAID set 2 utilizes 10K RPM SATA 150GB or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146GB for MAXPRO VMS database files and Microsoft SQL Server database files. Note: If fault tolerance is required, RAID set 1 is RAID 1, 10 or 0+1 and RAID set 2 is RAID 10 or 0 + 1. Multiple Monitor Card -Display Adapter (Video Display Adapter with Video resolution 1024x768 pixels; 32-bit color or higher Resolution) 22 Serial Ports Only required if serial device are to be connected Suggested 8 Port MOXA PCI-e serial RS232 Network Connection 1Gbit/sec or greater. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2-4 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer (Standard Spec with Windows 8.1 Professional 32-Bit and 64 bit, Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit Supports up to 2 monitors) Specification Description Processor Intel Core i7-4770K, 3.5 GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® 7 or 8.2 32&64 bit Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Workstation. Recommended System Memory (RAM) 8GB. DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD +/- RW. Disk 250GB 7200RPM SATA3 Multiple Monitor Card Display Adapter (Video NVIDIA Quadro NVS300, 512 MB Resolution) Network Connection Table 2-5 1Gbit/sec or greater. MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer (Performance Spec with Windows 8.1 Professional 32-Bit and 64 Bit, Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 4 monitors) Specification Description Processor Intel Core i7-4770K, 3.5 GHz Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® 7 or 8.2 32&64 bit Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Workstation. Recommended System Memory (RAM) 8 GB. DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD +/- RW MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 23 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Hardware Specifications Table 2-5 MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer (Performance Spec with Windows 8.1 Professional 32-Bit and 64 Bit, Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 4 monitors) Specification Description Disk 250GB 7200RPM SATA3 Multiple Monitor Card -Display Adapter (Video NVIDIA Quadro NVS510, 2GB Resolution) Network Connection Table 2-6 1Gbit/sec or greater. MAXPRO VMS Workstation Computer with Prowatch client (Performance Spec with Windows 8.1 Professional 32-Bit and 64 Bit, Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit supports up to 2 monitors) Specification Description Processor Quad Core Intel® Xeon® Processor E5620 (12M Cache, 2.40 GHz, 5.86 GT/s Intel® QPI). Recommended Operating System Microsoft Windows® 7 Professional (64-Bit and 32Bit), Microsoft Windows® 8.1 Professional 32-Bit and 64 Bit Few of the recorders run only on specific operating systems. Before installing the device drivers for the recorders, please refer to the “Operating Systems” sheet in the MAXPROVMS_HW_SW_Compatibility_Matrix.xls file available on the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD. 24 Recommended Computer Type (Server or Workstation) Workstation. Recommended System Memory (RAM) 8 GB. DVD Drive (RW (Read Write) is required if workstation is used for exporting recordings) DVD-RW drive. Disk Single Disk or RAID 0 or 0+1 10K SATA 80GB or 10K to 15K SAS 73GB: Windows Operating System. Multiple Monitor Card -Display Adapter (Video Resolution) 1 x 256MB PCIe x16 NVIDIA Quadro NVS 285, Dual DVI or Dual VGA or DVI+VGA. This is for a two monitor setup with each monitor requiring 128 MB. Network Connection 1Gbit/sec or greater. Video Resolution 1024x768 pixels; 24 bit color or higher. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Configuring the Monitor Display Properties CONFIGURING THE MONITOR DISPLAY PROPERTIES ................................................................. The recommended display settings for the monitor are dialog box resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels and color quality of 65K colors non-interlaced. The display settings can be configured from the Windows control panel or from the Windows desktop through the context menu. To configure the display settings from the context menu in the Windows desktop 1. Right-click the Windows desktop to display the context-menu. 2. Click Properties. The Display Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Settings tab. 4. Select the dialog box resolution and color quality. 5. Click Apply to save the settings. 6. Click OK to close the dialog box. To configure the display settings from the Windows control panel 1. Go to Windows control panel. Note: To open the control panel, click Start > Settings > Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon.The Display Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Settings tab. 4. Select the dialog box resolution and color quality. 5. Click Apply to save the settings. 6. Click OK to close the dialog box. ABOUT SERIAL EXPANDER ................................................................. The serial expander cable is used for increasing the number of serial ports in the computer. One end of the serial expander cable connects to a serial port in the computer. The other end of the serial expander cable consists of eight serial ports to which you can connect serial devices. For example, you can install the serial expander in the server to connect serial MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 25 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS About Serial Expander devices such as switchers, joystick controllers (Ultrak keyboard), and PITs used at the location. The following figure illustrates a serial expander cable. Each of the eight serial ports in the serial expander cable is marked with a number. This number is used for identifying the serial port while configuring the settings such as baud rate, data bits, and others using the MAXPRO VMS software. The following figure illustrates the serial port numbering in the serial expander cable. 26 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 ENABLING WINDOWS .NET 3.5 ................................................................. This section describes the procedure to enable .NET 3.5 on Windows 8 and Server 2012 machine with/without internet connection. Note: This section is not applicable for Windows 7 and Server 2008 machines to enable . NET 3.5. To enable .NET 3.5 on Windows 8 machine using internet connection 1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs and Features. The Programs and Features window appears. Figure 1-1 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Program and Features 27 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 2. Under Control Panel Home pane, click Turn Windows features on or off link. The Windows Features dialog box appears. Figure 1-2 3. Windows Features Select the following check boxes and then click OK. • • • .Net Framework 3.5 (includes .Net2.0 and 3.0) Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation Windows Communication Foundation Non-HTTP Activation To enable .NET 3.5 on Windows Server 2012 machine using internet connection 1. Navigate to Server Manager -> Manage and then click Add Roles and features link. Or Navigate to Server Manager -> Dashboard -> Configure this local server and then click Add Roles and features link as shown below. Figure 1-3 28 Server Manager Window MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 The Add Roles and Features Wizard appears. Figure 1-4 2. Add Roles and Features Wizard Click Next. The Add Role and Features Wizard appears. Figure 1-5 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Select Installation type 29 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 3. Click Role-based or feature- based installation option and then click Next. The Select Destination Server screen appears. Figure 1-6 4. Select destination server Click Select a server from the server pool option and then select the current machine name listed under Server Pool. Click Next. Select server roles screen appears. Figure 1-7 5. 30 Select Server Roles Under Roles, select the Application server (Installed) check box and then click Next. The Add Roles and Features Wizard appears MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 Note: The Add Roles and Features Wizard displayed differs on the HTTP Activation and Non-HTTP Activation features. Figure 1-8 6. Click Add Features button. Figure 1-9 7. HTTP Activation Non-HTTP Activation Click Add Features. The Select Features screen appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 31 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 Figure 1-10 8. Select the following feature check boxes in the Features pane: • • • • 9. Select Features .Net Framework 3.5 features .Net Framework 3.5 ( includes .Net 2.0 and 3.0 ) HTTP Activation Non-HTTP Activation Click Next. The Confirm installation selection screen appears. Figure 1-11 Confirm Installation Selection 10. Click Install. 32 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 To enable .NET 3.5 on Windows 8 and Server 2012 machine without internet connection 1. Insert the Windows OS DVD in the DVD drive. 2. Browse the Sxs folder and copy the path. For Example: E:\ Sources\SxS. 3. Execute the following command from the command prompt window using the Administrative privileges. The <<PATH_TO_WIN_SXS_FOLDER>> should be replaced with the actual path of Sxs folder as explained in step 2. %WINDIR%\system32\dism.exe /online /enable-feature /featurename:NetFX3 /featurename: WCF-HTTP-Activation /featurename:WCF-NonHTTP-Activation /all /Source:<<PATH_TO_WIN_SXS_FOLDER>> /LimitAccess Note: Use the cmd.exe available in the path C:\windows\system32 folder on 64 bit Operating System. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 33 2 SETTING UP THE CLIENT AND THE SERVER COMPUTERS Enabling Windows .NET 3.5 This page is intentionally left blank 34 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE ..... ................................... OVERVIEW ................................................................. This chapter describes the procedures for installing MAXPRO VMS R310 software. Follow the appropriate section in this chapter to complete the software installation. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that: 1. the client and server computers meet the software requirements. 2. Internet Information Services Manager (IIS) is installed on your computer. 3. Windows Updates are disabled. 4. UAC is disabled. 5. you have configured the user credentials which never expires in Computer Management window. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The client and server computers must meet the following specifications. Table 2-1 Software Specifications Operating System Microsoft Windows® 7 Professional (64-Bit and 32Bit) and Windows 8.1 OS for MAXPRO VMS Workstation. Microsoft Windows® Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64 Bit Version) on 64 Bit Server and Windows server 2012 OS for MAXPRO VMS Server. Antivirus McAfee® VirusScan 8.8, or Symantic® Antivirus V10. Monitor Resolution 1024x768 pixels, 65K colors non-interlaced. OPERATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE RECORDERS Few of the recorders run only on specific operating systems. Before installing the device drivers for the recorders, please refer to the “Operating Systems” sheet in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 37 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Overview MAXPROVMS_HW_SW_Compatibility_Matrix.xls file available on the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD. 38 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Installing the MAXPRO VMS Software INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS SOFTWARE ................................................................. To complete MAXPRO VMS installation follow the procedures in these sections. 1. First, How to Install MAXPRO VMS. 2. Choose the installation that best suits your requirements and follow the appropriate steps. • • Complete Installation Custom Installation HOW TO INSTALL MAXPRO VMS ................................................................. Note: The installing user should be administrator or domain/work group administrator To install MAXPRO VMS 1. Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD in the DVD drive. The setup runs automatically. If the setup does not run automatically, browse to the setup folder on the DVD and doubleclick Setup. exe. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 39 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS Note A confirmation message is displayed to disable the Automatic Windows updates as shown below. Click Yes to disable and proceed. The Welcome dialog box appears. See Windows Updates. Figure 3-1 2. 40 Welcome Click Next. The License Agreement dialog box appears. The dialog box displays the license agreement for the MAXPRO VMS software. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS Figure 3-2 License Agreement 3. Read the license agreement, and then click I accept the terms of the license agreement to accept the license agreement. 4. Click Next. The Customer Information dialog box appears. Figure 3-3 Customer Information 5. In the Registered To box, type your name. 6. In the Company Name box, type your company name. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 41 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS 7. Click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears. Figure 3-4 Note: 8. Honeywell recommends you to install the MAXPRO VMS R310 software in C drive. By default C drive is selected. Click Change to change the default destination folder, and then select the path to install. Click Next. The Validation of User Credentials dialog box appears. Figure 3-5 42 Choose Destination Location Validation of User Credentials MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS Note: 9. The user credentials of theWindows user that was used to log onto the machine In the Domain Name/Host Name list, type the domain name if you know it or select one from the list. If you are not installing on a domain choose the local computer name. 10. In the User Name box, type your Windows user name. Provide the admin credentials only. 11. In the Password box, type your Windows password. Provide the admin credentials only. Note: Ensure that you provide and install with Admin credentials only. 12. Select the Enable Auto Logon check box if you want the computer to reboot on its own whenever required, during the installation process. Note: You are prompted to reboot multiple times while installing MAXPRO VMS R310, auto log on avoids manual intervention during multiple reboots. 13. Click Next. The Installation Type dialog box appears. Figure 3-6 Installation Type 14. Select Custom Installation or Complete Installation as applicable. Use the instructions in one of the following sections that corresponds to the feature that you are installing, Complete Installation or Custom Installation. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 43 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE How to Install MAXPRO VMS Table 2-2 Select Features to Install Complete Installation Installs MAXPRO VMS Server, MAXPRO VMS Client, MAXPRO VMS Scheduler, MAXPRO VMS Trinity Framework, Device drivers, Adapters and Analytics Sever and Client. See Complete Installation. Custom Installation Helps you to choose between MAXPRO VMS Server, MAXPRO VMS Client and Analytics Sever and Client. See Custom Installation. Note: Choosing the “Custom Installation” option can save the installation time by eliminating the installation of any unnecessary modules. 44 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation COMPLETE INSTALLATION ................................................................. Complete installation can be selected when you are operating MAXPRO VMS R310 from a location that consists of all the Drivers, Switchers and Analytics Servers. Complete installation requires computers with performance configuration. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Complete installation can be done to: 1. • Server and Client. • Install Video Analytics Server Perform steps 1 through 13 of How to Install MAXPRO VMS, select Complete Installation in the Installation Type dialog box, and then click Next. Click Next. The Database Server Login dialog box appears. Figure 3-7 2. Database Server Login Click Browse, and then select any existing SQL database. You can select the existing SQL database on the same network or from a remote computer. If you do not want to select an existing database, proceed to step 4. Caution: If the SQL Server Express instance is available on a remote computer and if you do not have sufficient permissions to fetch the instance, then as a result an error message is displayed. In this scenario, the Database Administrator (DBA) must execute some SQL scripts so that instance is fetched. The scripts are available on the installation DVD. For different scenarios on SQL Express 2012 see SQL Express 2012 Scenarios. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 45 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation 3. Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below as per the requirement, and then click Next. You are prompted to install SQL Server 2012 Express. Figure 3-8 Note: 4. Prompt to install SQL Server 2012 Express See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios. If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails. Click Yes. The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears. Figure 3-9 Note: 46 Choose TrinityDatabase Location Click Browse to change the default destination folder, and then select the folder where the Trinity database server must be installed. It is best practice to Install the Database on a seperate Mirrored hard drive. This ensures the database is still available if the OS drive is failed or get corrupted. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation 5. Click Next. The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears. Figure 3-10 Note: 6. Click Browse to change the default destination folder, and then select the folder where the cache files must be installed. Click Next. The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears. Figure 3-11 7. Choose Cache file location Language selection for analytics application From the Language drop-down list, select the required language. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 47 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Complete Installation 8. Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Figure 3-12 9. Start Copying Files If you want to review or change any settings click Back. Note: The Start Copying Files dialog box displays the total approximate time for installing the prerequisites and total approximate time for installing the MAXPRO VMS R310 components. Please note that prerequisites take more time for installation than the MAXPRO VMS R310 components. 10. Click Next. The following message appears. Figure 3-13 Confirmation Message to install Prerequisites 11. Click Yes to install the prerequisites automatically, else click No. Note: 48 From step 12 onwards till the end of the installation, the prerequisites and MAXPRO VMS components are installed automatically without requiring any manual intervention. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 12. After all the prerequisites and MAXPRO VMS R310 components are successfully installed, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-14 Install Shield Wizard Complete 13. Click Finish. Your computer reboots. The installation is complete after the reboot operation. CUSTOM INSTALLATION ................................................................. Custom installation gives you an option to install the server and the client. You can choose to install various device drivers. The following table lists the type of installation you can do using the custom installation option. Table 2-3 Select features to install Server MAXPRO VMS server and device drivers are installed. See Server Installation. Client MAXPRO VMS client and MAXPRO VMS Framework are installed. See Client Installation. Honeywell Video Analytics (HVA) Video Analytics is installed, Video Analytics Server Installation SERVER INSTALLATION Server installation involves installing MAXPRO VMS server, device drivers, and redundant server. 1. Perform steps 1 through 13 in the section How to Install MAXPRO VMS. The Installation Type dialog box appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 49 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 2. Select Custom Installation, and then click Next. The Select Features dialog box appears. Figure 3-15 Note: 3. Beta version drivers are supported but not tested. Select MAXPRO VMS Server, and then click Next. Note: 50 Select Features You can add the device drivers and other features at a later stage if required. At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected component, you can clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software. See Cleaning the System. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 4. The Database Server Login dialog box appears. Figure 3-16 Database Server Login 5. Click Browse, and then select any existing SQL database. You can select the existing SQL database on the same network. If you do not want to select an existing database, click Next and proceed to step 7. The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears. 6. Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below as per the requirement, and then click Next. You are prompted to install SQL Server 2012 Express. Note: See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios. If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 51 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 7. Click Yes. The Choose TrinityDatabase location dialog box appears. Figure 3-17 Choose TrinityDatabase location Note: 8. Click Browse to change the default destination folder, and then select the folder where the Trinity database server must be installed. It is best practice to Install the Database on a seperate Mirrored hard drive. This ensures the database is still available if the OS drive is failed or get corrupted. Click Next. The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears. Figure 3-18 52 Choose Cache file location MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation Note: 9. Click Browse to change the default destination folder, and then select the folder where the cache files must be installed. Click Next. The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears. Figure 3-19 Language selection for analytics application 10. From the Language drop-down list, select the required language. 11. Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Figure 3-20 Start Copying Files 12. If you want to make any changes click Back. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 53 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation Note In some PCs the installation fails to enable MSMQ (Message Queuing) automatically. In such scenarios the following message is displayed. To resolve this issue 1. After the server installation is completed, download and install the windows update KB 2749655 (based on your Operating System) from the below site. http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2749655 2. Refer and perform the instruction given in the below site to enable the MSMQ. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa967729(v=vs.110).aspx 13. Click Next. The MAXPRO VMS Server is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-21 Install Shield Wizard Complete 14. Click Finish. The computer restarts and the installation is complete. 54 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation Note: At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected components, then you must clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and reinstall the R310 software. See Cleaning the System. CLIENT INSTALLATION 1. Perform steps 1 through 13 in the section How to Install MAXPRO VMS. The Installation Type dialog box appears. Figure 3-22 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Installation Type 55 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 2. Select Custom Installation, and then click Next. The Select Features dialog box appears. Figure 3-23 3. Select MAXPRO VMS Client. The MAXPRO VMS Framework, Device Drivers, and the Analytics Engine are selected automatically. Clear the check boxes corresponding to the device drivers that you do not want to install. Note: 56 Select Features If you are installing the drivers in a client PC and later if you upgrade the Client PC to Server PC then the respective driver scripts does not load the configurations in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Viewer. User should run the corresponding script (For example: HRDPUnInstallationScript.sql, PelcoInstallationScript.sql) manually to load the configurations from the Tools (Tools\SQLScripts\DVRScripts) folder. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 4. Click Next. The MAXPRO VMS Client configuration dialog box appears. Figure 3-24 5. MAXPRO VMS Client Configuration In the MaxproVMS Server box, type the name of the MAXPRO VMS Server, and then click Next. A dialog box asking for confirmation to add the client workstation to MAXPRO VMS database appears. Note: If the MAXPRO VMS Server is not available, then click Next. Figure 3-25 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Confirmation Message 57 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 6. Click Yes if you want to add the client workstation name in MAXPRO VMS database. Click No if you do not want to add client workstation name in MAXPRO VMS Server Database. If you click Yes, the Database Server Login dialog box appears. Figure 3-26 7. Click Browse, and then select any existing SQL database. You can select the existing SQL database on the same network. If you do not want to select an existing database, proceed to step step 9. 8. Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below. Note: 58 Database Server Login See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios section for various SQL 2012 Scenarios. If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails section. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 9. Click Next. The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears. Figure 3-27 Language selection for analytics application 10. From the Language drop-down list, select the required language. 11. Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Figure 3-28 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Start Copying Files 59 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Custom Installation 12. Click Next. The MAXPRO VMS client is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-29 Install Shield Wizard Complete 13. Click Finish. The computer restarts and the installation is complete. Note: At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected component, you can clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software. See Cleaning the System. R U N N I N G T H E D R I V ER S C R I P T S M A N U A L L Y After installing the drivers in Client PC for example ( NVR Driver, Digital Sentry, HRDP, HRXD, VMS in VMS, Milestone, LG, Panasonic, EXACQ, GeViScope, Pelco Endura) If the Client PC is upgraded to Server PC then the respective driver scripts does not load the configurations in the MAXPRO VMS R310 Viewer. User should run the corresponding script manually for example (HRDPUnInstallationScript.sql, PelcoInstallationScript.sql) from the Tools (Tools\SQLScripts\DVRScripts) folder. 60 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation VIDEO ANALYTICS SERVER INSTALLATION ................................................................. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • Ensure that the MAXPRO VMS server is installed. 1. Perform steps 1 through 13 in the section How to Install MAXPRO VMS. The Installation Type dialog box appears. Figure 3-30 2. Installation Type Select Custom Installation, and then click Next. The Select Features dialog box appears. Figure 3-31 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Select Features 61 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation 3. Select Analytics Engine, and then click Next. The MAXPRO VMS Client configuration dialog box appears. Clear the check boxes corresponding to the device drivers which you do not wish to install. Figure 3-32 4. MAXPRO VMS Client Configuration In the MaxproVMS Server box, type the name of the MAXPRO VMS Server, and then click Next. The Database Server Login dialog box appears. Figure 3-33 62 Database Server Login 5. Click Browse, and then select any existing SQL database. You can select the existing SQL database on the same network. If you do not want to select an existing database, proceed to step step 7. 6. Select Connect using option as Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation Note: 7. See SQL Express 2012 Scenarios for various SQL 2012 Scenarios. If you enter an invalid Login ID and Password to connect SQL Server then see Manual Steps if SQL Connection Fails. Click Next. The Language selection for analytics application dialog box appears. Figure 3-34 8. Language Selection for Analytics Application Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Figure 3-35 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Start Copying Files 63 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Video Analytics Server Installation 9. Click Next. The video Analytics is installed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-36 Install Shield Wizard Complete 10. Click Finish. Your computer restarts and the installation is complete. Note: At any point if the R310 installation fails to install the selected component, you can clean the system using the Uninstall Utility and then reinstall the R310 software. See Cleaning the System. AFTER INSTALLING MAXPRO VMS R310 The Loopback Adapters enables to stabilize the network connection in case of any network disconnect momentarily. The loopback adapters are required in a site to stabilize the network communication. In addition, these are recommended for MVMS servers. After installing the MAXPRO VMS, you must configure the Microsoft Loopback Adapter. To configure the Microsoft Loopback Adapter 64 1. Right-click My Network Places, and then select Properties. 2. Locate the LAN or High-Speed Internet connection that has a device name of Microsoft Loopback Adapter, right-click, and then select Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears. 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears. 4. Select Use the following IP address. 5. In the IP address box, type the IP address between the range of 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 or 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255. The subnet mask 255.255.255.0 appears in the Subnet mask box. Do not set a value for Default gateway 6. Click OK. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software REMOVING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE ................................................................. You can remove the MAXPRO VMS R310 completely or some of it’s components as per your requirements. BEFORE YOU BEGIN 1. Stop Trinity Analytics Services. a.Choose Start>Run, and then type services.msc. The Services window appears. b.Right-click Trinity Analytics Service, and then select Stop. 2. Stop Trinity Services. a.Choose Start>Run, and then type services.msc. The Services window appears. b.Right-click TrinityContoller, and then select Stop. c.Right-click TrinityServer, and then select Stop. To remove MAXPRO VMS R310 completely 1. Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup DVD in the DVD drive, browse to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder, and then double-click Setup. exe or Go to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder in your computer, and then double-click Setup. exe. The Setup Type dialog box appears. Figure 3-37 2. Setup Type Select Remove All, and then click Next. The following confirmation message appears. Figure 3-38 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Confirmation Message 65 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 3. Click Yes. The Restoring Trinity Database dialog box appears. Figure 3-39 4. Click Yes to retain the Trinity database and click No to delete the Trinity database. The Restoring Analytics Database dialog box appears. Figure 3-40 66 Restoring Trinity Database Restoring Analytics Database MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 5. Click Next. The MAXPRO VMS R310 is removed completely and Uninstall Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-41 6. Click Finish. You are prompted to reboot the computer. Figure 3-42 7. Uninstall Complete Prompt to remove few components Click OK. To remove few components 1. Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup DVD in the DVD drive, browse to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder, and then double-click Setup. exe or go to the MAXPRO VMS R310 setup folder in your computer, and then double-click Setup. exe. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 67 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 2. The Setup Type dialog box appears. Figure 3-43 3. Select Remove Few, and then click Next. The Select the features dialog box similar to the following figure appears. Figure 3-44 4. 68 Setup Type Select the Features Select the components that you wish to remove by selecting the respective check boxes. If you select the Analytics driver to uninstall and click Next then Restoring Analytics Database figure appears as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software Figure 3-45 5. Restoring Analytics Database Click the required option to retain the Analytics database residing in Analytics Engine, and then Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box similar to the following figure appears. Figure 3-46 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Start Copying Files 69 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software 6. Click Next. A confirmation message appears as shown below. 7. Click Yes to proceed. The selected components of the MAXPRO VMS R310 are removed and the Uninstall Complete dialog box appears. Figure 3-47 8. Click Finish. You are prompted to reboot the computer. Figure 3-48 9. Prompt to reboot the computer Click OK. Note: 70 Uninstall Complete You can remove the required component using the Add or Remove Programs in Windows. However, Honeywell recommends to follow the above mentioned steps to remove MAXPRO VMS R310 components. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE Removing the MAXPRO VMS R310 Software AFTER REMOVING MAXPRO VMS R310 After removing MAXPRO VMS, you must remove Microsoft Loopback Adapter manually. To remove loopback adapter 1. Right-click My Computer, and then select Properties. The System Properties dialog box appears. Figure 3-49 2. System Properties Click Device Manager. The Device Manager screen appears. Figure 3-50 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Device Manager 71 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios 3. Expand the Network Adapter branch, right-click Microsoft Loopback Adapter, and then select Uninstall. The Confirm Device Removal dialog box appears. Figure 3-51 4. Confirm Device Removal Click OK. SQL EXPRESS 2012 SCENARIOS ................................................................. The following table depicts the various scenarios of SQL Express 2012 while installing the VMS R310. Table 2-4 SQL Express 2012 Scenarios R310 Installation Scenarios SQL 2012 SP1 Express Supported OS SQL 2012 SP1 Express Unsupported OS ( If operating system service pack is not installed then) If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected without SQL instance. Installs the SQL Express 2012 SP1 and Create Database. It displays an error message as shown below. If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is selected + local SQL Standard Edition instance is selected. Creates the Database in the selected SQL Standard instance of any version. Create Database in the selected SQL Standard instance of any version. If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected + local SQL Express 2008 R2. Installs the SQL 2008 R2 SP1 (If Required) and Upgrade to SQL Express 2012 SP1 + Upgrade Database. Create Database in SQL Express 2008 R2 instance. If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is Selected + local SQL Express 2012 SP1. Creates the Database. This scenario is not possible. If you choose for Fresh installation and Server is selected + Remote SQL. Creates the Database. Create Database. 72 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios If you choose for Fresh installation and Client is selected. Client components will be installed. Client components will be installed. If you Upgrade from R300 Server to R310. Upgrades to SQL Express 2012 SP1, if R300 has SQL 2008 R2 available and upgrade the Database. Only Upgrade the Database (SQL will not be upgraded). If you Upgrade from R300 Client to R310. Upgrades the client. Upgrade the client. If you Upgrade from R300 Client and Server is selected in R310 with no SQL instance. Installs the SQL Express 2012 SP1 and create the Database. It displays an error message as shown below. CLEANING THE SYSTEM The Uninstall Utility allows you to clean all the installed R310 components in the system. Uninstall Utility is available in the installation path of VMS R310 under Tools folder. It contains the Database Files, SQL Scripts that allows you to clean the specific component. After you clean the system you need to reinstall the R310 software. Note: Use this utility, if uninstallation is not done properly. To access and run the utility • Browse the MAXPRO VMS R310 installation path for example C:\Program Files (x86)\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\Tools\UninstallUtility folder and doubleclick the UninstallUtility.exe. MAXPRO VMS Uninstall Utility window appears and displays the progress of cleaning. A D D I N G T H E R I G H T S T O T H E L O C AL A D M I N I S T R AT O R A C C O U N T After installing the SQL 2008 Express, the Installation fails to start the SQL service on Windows 2008 R2 machine. The following error message is displayed in the Event viewer: FileMgr::StartLogFiles: Operating system error 2 (The system cannot find the file specified.) occurred while creating or opening file 'e:\sql10_main_t.obj.x86fre\sql\mkmastr\databases\objfre\i386\MSDBLog.ldf'. Diagnose and correct the operating system error, and retry the operation. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 73 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios Cause This issue is by design and occurs because of the account that is running SQL Server Setup does not have one or all of the following rights: • • • The right to back up files and directories, The right to manage auditing and the security log and The right to debug programs. Resolution The Setup user account requires the above default user rights for the Setup to be completed successfully. To add the rights to the local administrator account 1. Log on to the computer as an administrator. 2. Click Start >Run, the Run command window appears. 3. Type Control admintools, and then click OK. 4. Double-click Local Security Policy, the Local Security Settings dialog box appears. 5. Click Local Policies, double-click User Rights Assignment, and then double-click Backup Files and Directories. The Backup Files and Directories Properties dialog box appears. 6. Click Add User or Group. The Select User or Groups dialog box appears. 7. Type the user account that is being used for setup, and then click OK two times. 8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other two policies that are mentioned in the "Cause" section. 9. On the File menu, click Exit to close the Local Security Settings dialog box. W I N DO W S U P D A T E S If the windows updates feature is enabled in any of the operating system then while installing MAXPRO VMS R310 the following message is displayed: User is recommended to wait until the windows updates are installed and then reinstall the VMS R310 software. 74 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios MANUAL STEPS IF SQL CONNECTION FAILS If the SQL Connection fails, because of invalid credentials entered in the SQL dialog box or for various reasons for example network problem, then the install wizard displays the following message: If you click Yes and complete the installation then you must perform the following manual steps to work with the application. 1. Update the config files with SQL server and windows/SQL authentication connection details. See To update the config files . 2. • Trinity.SystemServices.exe.config • Trinity.ServiceHost.Scheduler.exe.config Add the registry entries. See To add the registry entries . 3. Execute the create_trinity_db_R310.bat file. TO U PD ATE TH E CO NF IG FI LE S 1. Browse <<INSTALL_PATH>>\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\Bin\Trinity.SystemServices.e xe.config and then double-click the Trinity.SystemServices.exe.config file. Note: 2. <<INSTALL_PATH>> should be substituted with the actual path selected during installation. For SQL Authentication: a. In the User ID field, type the user ID. The default user name is “sa” b. In the Password field, type the password. The default user name is “Password1” c. In the Data Source field, type “.\SQLEXPRESS” 3. 4. 5. For Windows authentication: • In the Server field, type .\SQLExpress. Similarly browse <<INSTALL_PATH>>\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\Bin\Trinity.ServiceHost.Sche duler.exe.config and then double-click the Trinity.ServiceHost.Scheduler.exe.config file. Repeat the steps 2 and 3 to update the config file with SQL Authentication and Windows authentication. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 75 3 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios TO A D D T H E R EG I ST R Y ENT R I E S 1. Access the registry: [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Honeywell\TrinityFra mework]. 2. Update the registry value names with the SQL instance details which you are planning to use: Registry value Name Value TRINITYDATABASEPAT H= "c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL11.SQLEXPRESS64BIT\MSSQL\DA TA" Note: TRINITYDATABASEPATH should be replaced with the path fetched from the registry, apart from the selected SQL instance name's DATA path where mdf and ldf files will be stored. TRINITYDBSERVER= "admin-PCVMS\SQLEXPRESS64BIT" 3. Similarly access the registry: [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Honeywell\TrinityFra mework\DatabaseDetails] 4. Update the registry value names with the SQL instance details which you are planning to use: Registry value Name Value "PCNAME"= "admin-PCVMS" "CONNECTIONSTRING"= "Persist Security Info=False;User ID=sa;Password=Password1;Initial Catalog=TrinityDatabase;Data Source=adminPCVMS\SQLEXPRESS64BIT" "DATABASEPATH"= "c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL11.SQLEXPRESS64BIT\MSSQL\DA TA" Note: DATABASEPATH should be replaced with the path fetched from the registry, apart from the selected SQL instance name's DATA path where mdf and ldf files will be stored. 76 "INSTANCENAME"= "SQLEXPRESS64BIT" "PASSWORD"= "9bvmw??›¨" "TRINITYDBSERVER"= "admin-PCVMS\SQLEXPRESS64BIT" "SQLMODE"= "1" "USER"= "sa" “TRINITYDATABASEPA TH"= "c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL11.SQLEXPRESS64BIT\MSSQL\DA TA" MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios Note: If you are using 32 bit Operating System then you should not access the Wow6432 Node. EXE C U TI N G TH E C R EAT E _T R I N I TY _ D B_ R 31 0 . B A T F I L E Prerequisites Ensure that you have updated the config files and added the registry entries as explained in To update the config files and To add the registry entries . To execute the “create_trinity_db_R310.bat" file 1. Browse the "create_trinity_db_R310.bat" file in the Tools folder available in the setup media. 2. Right-click the “create_trinity_db_R310.bat” file and then select Run as Administrator. If you have selected SQL authentication then the execution prompts for SQL server name, windows authentication option or SQL authentication option, user name and password. 3. Provide the necessary details. The TrinityDatabase is created. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 77 3 78 INSTALLING THE MAXPRO VMS R310 SOFTWARE SQL Express 2012 Scenarios MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE ..... ................................... Configuring MAXPRO VMS involves setting up the application to perform surveillance operations. This is the most important phase for commissioning MAXPRO VMS as it involves organizing devices, users, and roles associated to them. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • • Ensure that you have completed MAXPRO VMS server and client hardware setup and software installation. Configure the firewall settings as mentioned in the Firewall Settings section. FIREWALL SETTINGS ................................................................. See the following tables while configuring the firewall settings for MAXPRO VMS. SERVER SIDE CONFIGURATION The following server side application executable files need to be excluded with the following port configuration. Application Description Port Type Port Number Trinity.SystemServices. exe Server Operations TCP Custom 20007 Controller TCP Custom 26026 DNS Server TCP Custom 53 Trinity.Controller.exe Controller Operations TCP Custom 26026 Scheduler Scheduler Operations TCP Custom 20010 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 77 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Firewall Settings RECORDERS Programs Applications Services Ports Port Type Port Number DCOM Services TCP Standard 135 File and Printer Sharing TCP Standard 139, 445 TCP Standard 137, 138 DNS Server TCP Standard 53 Client and Server Communication TCP Standard 80 Application Description Executable File Name IP Engine Camera Service HWDVSCameraManager.exe IP Engine COM Host Service System32\DllHost.exe IP Engine Event Service HWDVSEventServer.exe IP Engine Integrity Service HWDVSDBSIntegrity.exe IP Engine Multi Monitor Coordinator HWDVSMonitoeCoOrdinator.ex Application Description Executable File Name IP Engine Camera Service HWDVSCameraManager.exe IP Engine COM Host Service System32\DllHost.exe OTHER RECORDERS Recorder Name Port Type Port Number Fusion TCP Custom 4000 RapidEye TCP Custom 10000 Enterprise TCP Custom 2377 TCP Custom 2367 TCP Custom 2703 TCP Custom 1056 TCP Custom 8016 TCP Custom 10019 TCP Custom 4000 HRXD HRDP 78 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Firewall Settings Recorder Name Port Type Port Number Digital Sentry TCP Custom 18772 MileStone TCP Custom 1237 MAXPRO NVR TCP Custom 20007 TCP Custom 26026 TCP Custom 10000 CLIENT CONFIGURATION Application Name Purpose Type Port Number MMShell.Exe Server Connection Custom 20007 Rendering Connection Custom 20009 Controller Custom 26026 DNS Server Standard 53 Client Connection Custom 20007 DNS Server Standard 53 Trinity.RenderingServer.exe ULTRAKEY To avoid UltraKey device from going offline on a firewall enabled environment, please allow the following in the firewall rules. • ICMP 'echo-request' (type 8) packets out. • ICMP 'echo-reply' (type 0) packets in. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 79 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Configuring MAXPRO VMS CONFIGURING MAXPRO VMS ................................................................. You can configure the MAXPRO VMS using the Configurator tab in the user interface. The navigation area inside the Configurator tab helps you to configure devices, groups, and manage users and roles. To go to configurator tab 1. Double-click the icon on your desktop. The Log On dialog box appears. Figure 4-1 80 MAXPRO VMS Log on 2. In the Username box, type the user name. The default user name is “admin”. 3. In the Password box, type the password. The default password for the default user name “admin” is “trinity”. 4. Click . The Viewer tab appears by default. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Configuring MAXPRO VMS 5. Click Configurator tab. The Configurator screen appears. Figure 4-2 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Configurator tab 81 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Setting up a site using Configurator SETTING UP A SITE USING CONFIGURATOR ................................................................. A site enables you to monitor the activities in an area. Setting up a site involves adding and configuring the hardware devices, defining the users, partitions, recorder groups and event groups. Setting up a site involves the following: ADDING SITES A default site is added when you install MAXPRO VMS. You can use the default site and associate the hardware devices to it. You can also create new sites. See Site for more information. ADDING WORKSTATIONS Workstations are client computers in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed. The users can perform actions such as monitoring a site, generating reports, searching for video recording, and configuring (add, update, and delete) devices from these workstations. See Workstations for more information. ADDING PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of recorders, cameras, switchers, and monitors in a site. A default partition is added when you install MAXPRO VMS. You can associate the default partition to cameras and recorders or create new partitions. See Partitions for more information. Note: Partitions are used to limit user access to devices and cameras. ADDING ROLES AND USERS A default administrator user with the administrator privileges is created when you install MAXPRO VMS. The privileges for a user are defined in roles. You can define roles according to your requirements and assign them to users. The users are associated to a site. Only the users with access to the site can perform actions such as viewing video, acknowledging alarms, and others based on the user privileges. See Users and Roles for more information. ADDING CONTACT GROUP AND CONTACTS You can add a contact group of users with different roles and also store a contact in MAXPRO VMS. An alarm notification can be configured to a contact group. See Contact Group for more information. ADDING EVENT GROUPS An event group is a grouping of events that occur on devices. The events in each event group are defined when you add a device such as recorder, switcher, and camera. A default event group is added when you install MAXPRO VMS. You can use the default event group or create new event groups. See Event Group for more information. 82 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Setting up a site using Configurator ADDING RECORDER GROUPS Recorder group feature distributes the load on a controller. It allows you to create different groups and associate recorders to it. Associating recorders to the groups enables the load is distributed among the recorder controllers. See Recorder Groups for more information ADDING SERIAL PORTS Serial ports are added for communication with joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboards), switchers, and Protocol Interface Translators (PIT). You can add up to 20 serial ports to MAXPRO VMS server. See Serial Port for more information. ADDING ANALYTICS You can add analytics server for automating motion detection, triggering real-time alarms, and enabling fast search and retrieval of videos. The applications can be launched directly from the server or from a separate client personal computer (PC) that can access the server through a TCP connection. See Analytics for more information. ADDING RECORDERS You can add Rapid Eye, MAXPRO NVR, Enterprise, IP Engine, HRXD, Fusion, Milestone, DigitalSentry, MAXPRO VMS and HRDP recorders. After adding recorders, you can associate them with partitions, and define the events. Only users of the partition that is associated with the recorder can configure the recorder settings. Only the events defined for the recorder can be configured to trigger event based alarms. For example, if you associate Recorder Disconnected event to a recorder, you can configure an alarm to be triggered when this event occurs. See Recorders for more information. ADDING SWITCHERS Presently, you can add Vicon, Burle, American Dynamics, Pelco, VideoBlox, and MAXPRO switchers. See Switchers on page 179. ADDING VIDEO INPUTS You can add video inputs and associate them to recorders and switchers. See Video Inputs for more information. ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add video outputs like standard device, trunk, VCR, analog and digital monitors. See Video Outputs for more information. ADDING RELAYS You can add relays that can be connected to devices like switcher, recorder, cameras, keyboard, and high level device.Relays send signals that perform various actions. For example, you can set a relay to open the door automatically when a motion is detected in a particular region. See Relays for more information. ADDING ALARM INPUTS You can add alarm input to raise alarms through an external device in MAXPRO VMS. These alarm inputs can be associated to devices like switcher, recorder, cameras, keyboard, networks and high level device. See Alarm Inputs for more information. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 83 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Setting up a site using Configurator ADDING LOGICAL CAMERAS You can group the cameras using the logical camera option. Using the logical camera option, selection of a particular camera is made easier. See Logical Camera for more information. ADDING SEQUENCES You can define sequences to view live video streamed one after the other from cameras for a specified time interval. See for more information. ADDING SYSTEM MACROS A macro is a rule or pattern that specifies how a certain input sequence (often a sequence of characters) is mapped to an output sequence or action. See System Macros for more information. ADDING JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS An Ultrakey keyboard is referred to as the joystick controller. Using the Ultrakey keyboard, you can perform actions such as selecting a camera in the Viewer tab. See Joystick Controllers for more information. ADDING INTERCEPT KEYS Frequently used or repetitive sequence of keystrokes can be automated using intercept keys. Each intercept key is associated with a macro. See Intercept Keys for more information. SCHEDULING You can schedule an alarm notification, jobs to be performed at a stipulated time, configure SMTP setting, and create an email template in MAXPRO VMS. See Scheduler, Jobs, SMTP Server Settings, Alarm Notification and Creating an Email Template for more information. 84 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders RECORDERS ................................................................. Recorders are devices used for streaming video and recording video from surveillance cameras (analog cameras and IP based digital cameras). RECORDERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to recorders. You can restrict a non-associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the recorder. RECORDERS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions. Recorders have predefined events by default. An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated. For example, when a camera is added to a recorder, an event ‘CameraAdded’ is generated. You can also associate event attributes to events. ADDING A RECORDER Before you begin • Add Site. See Adding a Site for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. • Add Event Groups. See Adding an Event Group for more information. By default, a site, partition and event groups are available. You can associate the recorder to them or create new. To add a recorder 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. The General Settings screen for the recorder appears. Figure 4-3 4. Recorder General Settings In the Device Name box, type a name for the recorder. Maximum characters that you can type is 50. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 85 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 5. In the Description box, type a description for the recorder. 6. In the Recorder Type drop-down list, select the recorder. Device settings for the selected recorder appear. The following table explains how to configure the device settings for the recorders. Recorder Type To configure the device settings RapidEye • • • • • Enterprise • • • • • • • 86 In the Unit Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of RapidEye recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the Site Port box, the port number appears by default. In the System Password box, type the system password assigned to the recorder. In the Video Format drop-down list, select the required video format. In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Enterprise recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the IP Address/host name in database.. In the Redundant Site Address box, type the redundant IP address or the host name for the recorder. The redundant IP address is chosen when the primary IP address is unavailable. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password1, Password2, and Password 3 boxes, type the respective passwords assigned to access the recorder. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone. In the Date Format to Display drop-down list, select the date format as a applicable to the recorder. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings Fusion • • • • • • Intellex • • • • • IPEngine • • • • • In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Fusion recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the Site Port box, the port number appears by default. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password box, type the assigned password for the user. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone. In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Intellex recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name In the Live Port box, the port number appears by default. You can change the port number as applicable. In the Event Port box, the port number appears by default. You can change the port number as applicable. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone. In the Primary Database Server box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the computer where IP Engine database server is installed. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name In the Redundant Database Server box, type the redundant database server name only if you have a redundant server. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box, and then select the required time zone. Select the Enable Client Side PTZ check box to enable PTZ operations directly from the client workstation without using Trinity Controller. This feature is useful when MAXPRO VMS client and devices are on the local network and Trinity Controller is on a Wide Area Network (WAN). Note: To configure the advanced settings for IP Engine, see Advanced Settings for IP Engine. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 87 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings HRXD • • • • • • • Digital Sentry • • • • • • 88 In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the HRXD recorder. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the Watch Port box, type the port number. In the Search Port box, type the port number. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password box, type the password to access the recorder. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box, and then select the time zone from the dropdown list. In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the Digital Sentry recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the Site Port box, the port number appears by default. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password box, type the password to access the recorder. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings MileStone • • • • • • • • In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or host name of the computer where the Milestone Server application is installed.Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. In the User Type drop down list, select either “Basic” or “Windows User” as applicable. In the User ID box, type the user name of the selected user. In the Password box, type the password of the selected user. In the Central Address box, type the IP address or host name of the computer where Mile Stone Server application is installed. In the Central Port box, the port number appears by default. In the User ID box, the default central user name “adm in” is displayed. In the Password box, the default central password “pass” is displayed. Note: The central User ID and Password information is very important for receiving events and alarms from the Milestone device, and are configured in the Milestone Management Application. MAXPRO NVR • • • • • • • MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide In the Unit Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the MAXPRO NVR recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check boxt o check the availability of the host name. In the Search Pot box, the port number appears by default. In the Controller Port box, the port number appears by default. In the StorageEngine Port box, the port number appears by default. In the User Name box, the user name appears by default. In the Password box, the password appears by default. 89 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Type To configure the device settings MAXPRO VMS • • • • • In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the MAXPRO VMS recorder. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. Select the Check for duplicate IP address/hostname in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password box, type the password to access the recorder. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box and select the required time zone. Note: See VMS as a Recorder for more information about MAXPRO VMS recorder. HRDP • • • • • • • In the Site Address box, type the numeric IP address or the host name of the HRDP recorder. Not supported: Check for duplicate IP address/ device name in the database check box to check the availability of the host name. In the Site Port box, the port number appears by default. In the User ID box, type the user name to access the recorder. In the Password box, type the password to access the recorder. In the Device Type drop-down list, select the device type as applicable. Select the Time Zone check box to enable the global time zone box, and then select the time zone from the dropdown list. 7. In the Recorder Version drop-down list, select the recorder version. 8. In the Site drop-down list, select the site to which the recorder is to be associated. 9. Associate Partition. See Discovering Devices for more information. 10. Associate Events and Event Attributes. See Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Recorder for more information. 11. Click Save. 12. Click Discover Devices to discover various devices that are connected to MAXPRO VMS. See Discovering Devices for more information. ADDING RECORDER IN BULK Using Add Bulk feature you can add number of recorder at once. To add the recorder in bulk 1. 90 In the Recorder screen, select the required recorder check box. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 2. Right-click on the selected recorder name and then click Add Bulk as shown below. The Add Recorders window is displayed as shown below. 3. Type the number of recorder to add in Recorders to Add box and then click OK. The number of new recorders added is highlighted in the recorder screen as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 91 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders VMS AS A RECORDER This feature is also called “VMS in VMS”. You can configure MAXPRO VMS as recorder similar to any other recorder like Fusion, Enterprise and so on. This configuration is useful if there are more than 10000 MAXPRO VMS's configured in different locations and you want to control them from one master MAXPRO VMS. For example, there are 3 sites A, B, and C having MAXPRO VMS1, MAXPRO VM2, MAXPRO VMS3 configured. Here A is considered as the centralized site where the master VMS, MAXPRO VMS1 is configured. In this scenario, you can configure the MAXPRO VMS 2 and MAXPRO VMS 3 as recorders in a MAXPRO VMS1 and monitor the surveillance operations. ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR IP ENGINE You can do the following in the advanced settings for the IP Engine. • Configuring the Audit Log. • Managing Disk Space for IP Engine. • Monitoring the Status of the Camera Server. • Viewing the Version and License Information for IP Engine. CONFIGURING THE AUDIT LOG The audit log is stored in the IP Engine database. The IP Engine uses the audit log to provide a report of all user actions and system events. See About Reports. You cannot configure the type of system events recorded in the audit logs but you can configure the length of time for which they are stored. The size of the audit log depends on how often system events are generated and the length of time they are stored. To avoid excessive use of disk space, store the audit logs only for the necessary time. A recommended setting is between a week and a month. To configure the length of time for which the audit logs are saved in the database 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine, and then click Update. The general settings for the IP Engine appear. 4. Click the Advance Settings tab. The advance settings for the IP Engine appear. 5. Click the Audit Log tab. 6. In the Keep audit events for: box, select the length of time for which the audit logs must be saved in the IP Engine database. MANAGING DISK SPACE FOR IP ENGINE The IP Engine can be configured to raise alarms, start deleting video clips automatically, or stop recording onto a disk when the free space drops below the configured minimum levels. Even after you have configured disk space settings, the disk can still run out of space if: 92 • The rate at which recordings are being made is greater than the rate at which old recordings are being deleted. • No clips suitable for automatic deletion can be found on the disk. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders If you configure the deletion threshold at a value larger than the volume of the disk, the IP Engine disables automatic clip deletion for that disk. An alarm is raised to notify the operator that automatic clip deletion is disabled for the disk. The IP Engine raises an alarm when there is a need for automatic clip deletion on a disk. Alarms are raised each time the IP Engine begins automatic clip deletion. This is followed by alarms raised every ten minutes, until the available disk space exceeds the configured automatic clip deletion value. If the amount of free disk space is near the automatic clip deletion value, alarms are raised more frequently. To manage disk space 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine, and then click Update. The general settings for the IP Engine appear. 4. Click the Advance Settings tab. The advance settings for the IP Engine appear. 5. Click the Disk Space tab. 6. In the Camera Server box, select the server for which you want to configure the disk space. 7. In the Disk box, select the disk for which you want to configure the space. 8. Configure the following disk properties according to your requirements. Disk Property Description Raise a low disk space alarm when free disk space reaches Alarm is raised when the free disk space falls below the specified value. Minimum value is 1000 MB. Automatically delete clips when free disk space reaches If selected, video clips are automatically deleted, when the free space on the disk falls below the specified value. Minimum value is 1000 MB. This value must be less than the low disk space alarm value. Allow deletion of clips marked for archiving If selected, video clips that are marked for archiving are deleted. Raise a very low disk space alarm when free disk space reaches Low disk space alarm is raised if the free disk space falls below this value. Start recording again when free disk space reaches The minimum free disk space required to start recording. The IP Engine resumes recording after having stopped due to insufficient disk space. Stop recording when free disk space reaches The recording stops if the minimum free disk space falls below this value. Minimum value is 1000 MB. This value must be less than the automatic clip deletion alarm value. Minimum value is 1000 MB. This value must be less than the start recording again value. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 93 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders You can view the disk space details in the Disk Usage table. The following table defines the labels in the table. Label Description Directory The folder in which video clips are stored. DVM Clips (GB) If selected, video clips are automatically deleted, when the free space on the disk falls below the specified value. Minimum value is 1000 MB. This value must be less than the low disk space alarm value. Free space (GB) The remaining free disk space, expressed in GB. Free space (%) The remaining free disk space, expressed in %. Hourly usage (MB/hr) Indicates, the rate at which video is being stored on the disk. The value is shown based on the usage rate for the minute before you called up the display, or since you last clicked Refresh. Disk Health Indicates the disk’s health: The options are OK or Fault (indicates improper function of the disk to record video). MONITORING THE STATUS OF THE CAMERA SERVER You can view the status of each camera server. The status is indicated as: OK or Software Fault. To view the status of the camera server 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. 3. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 4. Double-click the IP Engine or select the IP Engine, and then click Update. The general settings for the IP Engine appear. 5. Click the Advance Settings tab. The advance settings for the IP Engine appear. 6. Click the Server Status tab. The list of camera servers and their status is displayed. VIEWING THE VERSION AND LICENSE INFORMATION FOR IP ENGINE To view license information of IP Engine 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the recorder or select the recorder, and then click Update. The general settings for the recorder appear. 4. Click the Advanced Settings tab. 5. Click the About tab. The version and license information is displayed. The following table provides the information details. Version Information Version The version of recorder. Host Information 94 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Host Name The name of the EBI, Experion, or HSS server, if the recorder is used in conjunction with EBI, Experion, or HSS server. None, if the recorder is not used in conjunction with EBI, Experion, or HSS server. General License Information Cameras The number of cameras licensed for your system. IE Clients The number of Microsoft Internet Explorer clients licensed for your system. Redundancy Indicates whether database server redundancy is licensed for your system. Video Analytics License Information Premium Algorithm Indicates whether the premium algorithm is licensed for your system. Object Tracking Algorithm The number of cameras licensed to use the object tracking algorithm. Object Tracking and Classification Algorithm The number of cameras licensed to use the object tracking and classification algorithm. Stationary Object Detection Algorithm The number of cameras licensed to use the stationary object detection algorithm. Third Party License Information Third party licenses Click View Licenses to see the license details of third party products used by the recorder for functions, such as video compression. DISCOVERING DEVICES Discover devices feature allows you to discover the devices associated to recorders (For example: MAXPRO NVR, EXACQ, Panasonic, MAXPRO VMS, GeViscope, EnduraExpress, HRXD, LG, Milestone, DigitalSentry, Enterprise and Fusion, RapidEye) To discover recorder devices 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the check box corresponding to the recorder from which you want to discover devices. The recorder screen and the settings appear. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 95 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 4. Click Discover Devices. The Discovery Wizard dialog box appears. Figure 4-4 96 Discovery Wizard 5. Select the device or devices that you want to discover. 6. Click View Advanced Settings to configure advanced settings and to specify the order of discovered devices. Settings Instruction Start from last Callup number Select this option if you want to add the device from the last callup number of the device type that has been selected. Use free Callup number Select this option to use the available callup number in the device type that has been selected. Select starting Callup number Type the starting callup number, and then choose an option from If Callup number already exists, what do you want to do? section. See step 7. Override device name if it already exists Select the option to override the device name that already exits. Use Enterprise System Number as Callup Number Select the option to use the same callup number of Enterprise. When this option is selected, choose the options from If Callup number already exists, what do you want to do? section and Camera Type Selection. See step 7 and step 8. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Settings Instruction Use Child VMS Callup Number as Callup Number Note: This feature is applicable only for MAXPRO VMS recorder. Select the option to use the same callup number of the cameras configured in the child VMS. When this option is selected, choose the options from If Callup number already exists, what do you want to do? section. See step 7. 7. In If Callup number already exists, what do you want to do? selection, select the required option. The available options are: • Add to End - appends to the end of existing call up number. • Override - overrides the callup number. • Don't Add - does not add the callup number 8. In Camera Type Selection section, select Add Camera as Digital Camera or Add Camera as Hybrid Camera. 9. Click View Discover Log to view any log. 10. Click Close once connection established status appears in Discovery Status section. Note: All the cameras connected to the recorders would be added. The list of cameras appear in the Site window in the Devices tab. In case of IP Engine, Discover IP Cameras (Axis/Equip) screen appears. You can select the cameras that you want to add and the Camera Server, Video Clip Directory and Video Format. To discover cameras connected to recorders (such as IP Engine, HRDP) 1. Click the Discover Cameras. 2. The Discover IP Cameras (Axis/Equip) dialog box appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 97 4 98 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 3. Select the check box corresponding to the camera or cameras that you want to add. 4. From the Site drop-down list, select the required site. 5. In the Camera Server drop-down list, select the IP Engine Camera Server. 6. In the Video Clip Directory box, type a path to store video clips. 7. In the Video Format drop-down list, select a format for the video. 8. Click Add. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE RECORDER You can associate partitions to recorder. Associating a partition to a recorder restricts a nonassociated user of the partition from viewing the recorder or changing the settings of the recorder. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partition to a recorder 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Recorders branch. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 4. Double-click the recorder you want to associate. The General Settings screen appears. 5. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. Figure 4-5 6. Recorder Partitions Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. Figure 4-6 Select Partitions 7. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 8. Click OK. The recorder is associated with the partition. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 99 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders To disassociate partition from a recorder • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. Note: Partitions associated to a recorder cannot be removed unless they are removed from the devices that are connected to the same recorder. ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A RECORDER You can associate one or more events to a recorder. An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the recorder. For certain events, you can also associate event attributes. For example, for an Encoder Disabled event, you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name, Encoder ID and so on. For every attribute that you associate, you can set a value based on which the event is triggered. In the above example, you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A. When this event is associated to the recorder, an alarm is raised when the event “Encoder Disabled” occurs for the Encoder Name “Encoder A”. Attributes are available only for certain events. These events can be associated to a recorder multiple times. The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window. To view the event attributes of an alarm, right-click the alarm, and then click Show Details. To associate events to a recorder 1. Click the Events tab. The screen displays the associated events if any. Figure 4-7 2. 100 Recorder Events Click Associate. The Select from List dialog box appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Figure 4-8 Select from List 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate. 4. Click OK. Note: For a MAXPRO VMS recorder, all the events that are configured for the recorders in the child VMS are displayed. Hence the Associate and Remove buttons are disabled. To associate any new events, you must configure them in the child VMS, and again reconfigure the child VMS in the master VMS. To disassociate events from a recorder • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. To add event groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the event group. 2. Double-click the value under the Event Group column. The Select EventGroup dialog box appears. Figure 4-9 Select Event Group 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event group you want to add. 4. Click OK. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 101 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Note: You need to add an event group before you associate it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To disable an event 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable. 2. Click the text under the Disabled column. A drop-down list is enabled. 3. Select True. To assign severity level 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want assign severity level. 2. Click the value under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. To enter remarks 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks. 2. Click the text under the Remarks column and type the remarks. To assign macros 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros. 2. Click the box under the Start Procedure column, and then type the required macro. 3. Click the box under the End Procedure column, and then type the required macro. ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin • Associate events. To associate event attributes 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes. The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane. 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event attributes from a recorder • 102 Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute, and then click Remove. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders The following table describes the event name, event attributes, and their description. Recorder Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description IP Engine ReplicationHealth Changed Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. RedundancyConfi gurationChanged PreferedDatabase ServerName Computer name of the preferred Database server. RedundantDataba seServerName Computer name of the preferred Database server. PreferredDatabase ServerChanged PreferedDatabase ServerName Machine name of the preferred Database server. NetworkHealthCh anged Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. DiskHealthChang ed Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server. DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer {c:, d:}. DatabaseServerFa ilover PreferedDatabase ServerName Machine name of the preferred Database Server. CameraServerHea lthChanged Health Status Machine name of the Camera Server. CameraServerNa me Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. CameraDeleted CameraAdded MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 103 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description DiskHealthOk Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server. DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer {c:, d:}. CameraName Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. Health Status Machine name of the Camera Server. ComputerName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer {c:, d:}. Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. Database Server Name Machine name of the Database Server. Health Status Possible health values like OK, Failure, and Unknown. ComputerName Machine name of the Camera Server. DiskName Disk drive name of the Camera Server Computer {c:, d:}. Disk Health Unknown DatabaseServerHe althChanged LowDiskSpace 104 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description Enterprise Encoder Connected Encoder Name Name of the encoder. The format is { encodername (Station ID) } Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID. Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID. Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Name Name of the encoder. The format is { encodername (Station ID) } Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID. Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID. Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Name Name of the encoder. The format is { encodername (Station ID) } Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID. Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID. Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Name Name of the encoder. The format is { encodername (Station ID) } Encoder ID Numeric value of the Encoder ID. Station ID Numeric value of the Station ID. Device Type Type of encoder IP Address IP Address of encoder Encoder Disconnected Encoder Enabled Encoder Disabled MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 105 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description RingBuffer Insufficient Space RingBuffer Name Name of the RingBuffer RingBuffer StationID Numeric value of RingBuffer RingBuffer ID Numeric value of RingBuffer ID RingBuffer Name Name of the RingBuffer RingBuffer StationID Numeric value of RingBuffer RingBuffer ID Numeric value of RingBuffer ID Station Connected Station Numeric value of Station ID Station Disconnected Station Numeric value of Station ID Output Enabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Output Disabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Instance ID Numeric value of the recorder ID VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Server Disconnected Instance ID Numeric value of the recorder ID VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Controller Connected Instance ID Numeric value of the recorder ID VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID MAXPRO VMS Controller Disconnected Instance ID Numeric value of the recorder ID VMS ID Numeric value of the VMS ID RingBuffer Hardware Error Fusion Recording Settings Retrieved MAXPRO VMS 106 MAXPRO VMS Sever Connected MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name MAXPRO NVR Recording Server Connected Event Attributes Attribute Description Recording Server Disconnected Low Disk Space Recording Server Connected Recording Server Disconnected MAXPRO NVR Controller Connected MAXPRO NVR Controller Disconnected Recording Settings Retrieved HRDP Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Output Enabled Output Disabled Milestone Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Central Server Connected Central Server Disconnected Digital Sentry Recorder Connected Recorder Disconnected Output Enabled Output Disabled Intellex Recorder Connected MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 107 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name RapidEye Recorder Connected Event Attributes Attribute Description Recorder Disconnected Sessions Rejected System - Self Restart System - Reboot System - No Video Recording System - Storage Device Missing System - Time Server Unusable System - No Synchronization in 24 Hours System S.M.A.R.T Disk Failure Rule Engine Action Triggered System Excessive System Clock Drift Maintenance Configuration Modification Maintenance Security Modification Maintenance System Files Modification 108 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Recorder Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description Output Enabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Output Disabled RelayNumber Numeric value of the Input Number Maintenance Synchronize Time Maintenance Clear Storage Maintenance Clear Stream System - Runtime Failure Session Disconnected Session Connected ADVANCED SETTINGS Caution: This tab displays only for the MAXPRO NVR recorder. Figure 4-10 Advanced tab for MAXPRO NVR Recorder The configured settings for the MAXPRO NVR recorder are displayed in the following five tabs. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 109 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders • System • Camera • Schedule • I/O • Sequence • User You can navigate to each of these tabs and change the configured settings as applicable. FILTERING AND GROUPING THE RECORDERS Filter feature enables you to filter and group the required number of recorder columns. Filtering recorders can be performed in two ways. a. By dragging and dropping specific column headers to group with the other columns. b. By defining the row values to display the required columns. To filter and group the recorder columns by drag and drop 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Recorders branch. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-11 Recorder Filtering 4. 110 Drag and drop the required columns in upper header area to view the corresponding column details. Or Right-click on the required column name and then choose Group by or Ungroup by option. Example 1: If you want to view the details of only Name, Type and IP columns at once, drag and drop the columns one after another to the upper header area as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Figure 4-12 Recorder grouping Example 2: If you want to group the columns by Name then right- click on the Name column and then choose Group by “Name” option as shown below. The column arrangement is displayed a shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 111 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 5. Click under each node to expand and view the details. Similarly repeat the step 4 to add more column headers. To remove the column headers from the Grouped By area • Drag the required columns from the Grouped By area and drop into the actual header area. To filter the recorder columns by defining the value 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Recorders branch. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-13 112 Recorder Screen MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 4. Click 5. Under Select All, select the required check boxes to display the row elements as shown below. . Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below. OR In the Show rows with value that, perform the following: a. Select the required option from the Is equal to drop-down list. b. Type the required value corresponding to your selection. c. Select the required option from the AND/Or drop- down list. d. Select the required option from the Is equal to drop-down list corresponding to your option selected. e. Type the required value corresponding to your selections. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 113 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders f. Click Filter. The recorder columns based on your requirement is displayed. For example If you define a row value as: value Starts with, MAXPRO NVR, And, that Is not equal to, Enterprise then the result of the filter is displayed as shown below. Figure 4-14 Defining Filter To Clear or Reset the filter • Click Clear Filter in the dialog box Or Click Reset Filter to reset all the filters. SORTING RECORDER Sorting feature enables you to sort the required columns ascending or descending. It also allows you to group or ungroup based on the specific column. To sort the columns ascending or descending 114 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Recorders branch. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders Figure 4-15 Recorder Screen 4. Right click on the required column name. Sorting options are displayed as shown below. 5. Choose the required Ascending or Descending option. The columns information is arranged accordingly as shown in figure 12. CHOOSE THE COLUMNS TO DISPLAY You can choose the attributes of recorder to display in the recorders screen. To choose the columns to display 1. Right click on any column header and then point to Choose Columns. The available column names are displayed. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 115 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorders 2. Select or clear the required column. Based on the selection the column table are displayed. UPDATING A RECORDER You can update a recorder to change the settings like the recorder name, site, site address, user ID, and password. To update a recorder 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the recorder you want to update. 4. Click Update. The settings for the recorder appear. You can modify the settings. DELETING A RECORDER Before you begin Remove the associations with the video inputs or delete all the video inputs that are associated with the recorder. To delete a recorder 116 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Recorders. The Recorders screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the recorder you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs VIDEO INPUTS ................................................................. Video inputs are devices through which video is supplied into MAXPRO VMS. Video input devices can be logically grouped in MAXPRO VMS so that selecting and updating them is easier. The following types of video input devices are supported. • Camera -fixed or PTZ. • Standard Device - other devices, freeze frames, and so on. • Smart Device - devices such as multiplexers. • Trunk - trunk video input (from a networked system). • VCR (Video Cassette Recorder)- dedicated or Dub VCR. • Standby VCR - Standby VCR as used in VCR Management. • Logging VCR - Monitor logging VCR as used in VCR Management. • Menu - MAXPRO-Net system menu (using MaxMon). • Black Source - black source for monitor blanking. • Digital Input Trunk - to view analog camera video. VIDEO INPUTS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to cameras. You can restrict a non-associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the camera. VIDEO INPUTS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions. Video inputs have events set by default. For example, when a camera connection is lost, an event 'CameraDisconnected' is generated. You can also associate event attributes to events. An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated. VIDEO INPUTS AND ANALYTICS Analytics can be configured for video inputs like cameras. Video analytics monitors the video from cameras at real time and triggers alarms to whenever an event occurs. ADDING VIDEO INPUTS Before you begin • Add Site. See Adding a Site. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition. • Add Event Groups. See Adding an Event Group. • Add Recorders. See Adding a Recorder. • Add Switchers. See Adding a Switcher. By default, a site, partition, and event groups are available. You can associate the camera to them or create new. You can add a camera to view live video and record video. You can associate cameras to partitions and events. To add a video input 1. Click the Configurator tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 117 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Inputs. The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area, and displays the list of video inputs. Figure 4-16 3. Click Add. The Camera screen appears by default. Figure 4-17 4. 118 Video Inputs Camera Screen From the Device Type drop-down list, select the required video input type. The currently supported video input device types are listed in the following table. Video Input Device Description Camera For details on configuring a camera, see Adding a Camera. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Video Input Device Description Standard Device For details on configuring the devices, see Adding a Video Input Device on page 162. Smart Device Trunk VCR Standby VCR Logging VCR Menu Black Source Digital Input Trunk For details on configuring a digital input trunk, see Adding a Video Input Device (Digital Input Trunk). 5. Associate Partition. See Associating Partitions to Video Inputs for more information. 6. Associate Events and Event Attributes. See Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Video Input for more information. 7. Associate Analytics. See Associating Analytics for more information. Note: 8. You can associate analytics only for cameras. Click Save. ADDING A CAMERA Adding a camera involves defining the camera’s set up and operation across switchers and recorders. You can update or configure the general settings of a camera to configure PTZ settings and connect a camera to a recorder or switcher. To configure a camera 1. In the Camera Type area, click PTZ Camera if the configured camera is PTZ or click Fixed Camera if the camera type is fixed. 2. In the Video Input Details area, specify the following camera details. Field Description Video Input Name Type a camera name. The camera name appears in the devices window making it easy to select. Description Type a description for the camera. Callup Number A unique number that identifies the camera. By default, the next available number is allocated. The operators can use the number to quickly view the live video from the camera using the virtual keyboard. Site Location of the camera. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 119 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 3. 4. In the Alternative Camera Settings area, specify the following details. Settings Description Alternate Camera Type the number of the camera that has to be selected alternate camera option is selected from the context menu while playing or viewing live video. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 999999999. Zero (0) is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. Alternate Camera View Type the camera view number or preset number to select the preset view for the alternate camera. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. In the Connected To area, select Recorder, if you want to connect the camera to a recorder (see Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information). Select Switcher, if you want to connect the camera to a switcher (see Associating a Switcher to a Video Input for more information). Note: 5. If you select Recorder check box then Input Number (Recorder) text box is displayed. Type the input number for recorder. Select the Net Source box when you want to view a video from a camera connected to the MAXPRO VMS within a network configuration. Specify the following details. Settings Description Net Source Specify the network node and the camera number from which you want the video input. When the current video input is actually connected to another MAXPRO VMS within a network configuration, the Net Source field is used to specify the exact location and reference for the video input device. Link Select if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video input device on the network. Switcher Settings, Advance Settings, and PTZ control Settings. • • Configure the Switcher Settings and Advance Settings. See Associating a Switcher to a Video Input for more information. Configure the PTZ Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. To preview video when camera is associated to a recorder 120 • Select the Preview check box to view live video from the camera. • Click the icon to save the current image in the clip video directory. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs • Click the icon to open any saved image in the preview screen and position the camera accordingly. • Click the Note: icon to delete the image in the preview screen. Using the preview option, a user can take snapshots of the area to be monitored by the surveillance camera and save them. These snapshots can be used to identify the proper location where the camera needs to be installed so that the desired field of view is obtained. This can also be used to reposition the camera and identify changes in camera field of view. ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE Video input devices like cameras and digital input trunk can be associated with different recorders. Video clips are recorded and stored in recorders. To associate a camera to a recorder 1. In the Connected To section, select Recorder check box. The Recorder drop-down list is enabled. 2. Select the recorder. The device settings for the recorder appear. Perform the instructions listed in the following table. Recorder Type Instructions RapidEye Recorder Settings for Fixed Camera Type • In the Live Resolution drop-down list, select a resolution for the recorder. • In the Live Frame Rate drop-down list, select a frame rate for the recorder. Recorder Settings for PTZ Camera Type • In the PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list, select a number for PTZ sensitivity. Control Settings • Configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as the Camera Type. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 121 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Recorder Type Instructions Fusion Recorder Settings • In the PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list, select a number for PTZ sensitivity. Note: The PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list is enabled only when you select the PTZ option in the General Settings (See Adding a Camera for more information) of the camera. The numbers represent the speed of the PTZ. The higher the number, the more the PTZ speed. Control Settings • Configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type. Enterprise Recorder Settings • • • • • In the Site ID box, type the site ID configured in the Enterprise DVR. In the Station ID box, type the station ID configured in the Enterprise DVR. In the Device Type box, type the model of the device. In the Device ID box, type the device ID of the Enterprise DVR. In the PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list, select a number for PTZ sensitivity. Note: The PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list is enabled only when you select the PTZ option in the General Settings (See Adding a Camera for more information) of the camera. The numbers represent the speed of the PTZ. The higher the number, the more the PTZ speed. Control Settings • Configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type. Note: The source information is automatically updated when the Discover Cameras feature is used. HRXD • In the Control Settings tab, configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type. 122 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Recorder Type Instructions Intellex Recorder Settings • In the Resolution drop-down list, select the required resolution. • In the Video Quality drop-down list, select the required video quality. The range is between 10-100 (compression quality). Control Settings • Configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type. IPEngine Recorder Settings • In the Camera Server drop-down list, select the camera server. • In the Camera Server Clip Directory box, type the directory path to save the clips or click Set to camera server installed path to set the camera server installed path for saving clips. • In the Streamer IP Address box, type host name or IP address of the streamer. • In the Streamer type drop-down list, select the model number of the streamer. Note: MAXPRO VMS supports five mega pixel cameras like GrandEye, Sony, HCX, HNVE1, and Pelco. • In the Compression Format drop-down list, select the required format. MPEG4 and Motion JPEG are the available formats. • In the Limit Stream By drop-down list, select the frame rate or network bandwidth to limit streaming. • In the Stream Type drop-down list, select the stream type as video or audio. • In the Frame Delivery drop-down list, select the delivery type as Unicast or Multicast depending on the requirement. • In the Video Channel Number box, type the input number of the streamer to which you are connecting the camera. See Configuring Cameras for IP Engine for more information on configuring GrandEye and Axis240Q cameras. Note: The Video Channel Number field is applicable only to the cameras that support more than one streaming at a time. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 123 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Recorder Type Instructions • • • • • In the Video Format drop-down list, select the type of camera (NTSC or PAL). In the Resolution drop-down list, select the resolution for the video. See Configuring Cameras for IP Engine for more information on configuring this field for GrandEye and HSX cameras. In the Compression Ratio drop-down list, select the degree of compression. In the GOP box, type the required group of picture. In the Frame Rate drop-down list, select the number of frames per second while capturing a video. Control Settings • Configure the Control Settings. See Control Settings for more information. Note: The Control Settings tab appears only when PTZ is selected as Camera Type. Advanced (Recorder) Settings • See Advance Settings for Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information. MAXPRO NVR Note: 124 Recorder Settings • In the PTZ Sensitivity drop-down list, select a number for PTZ sensitivity. For more details on the camera specifications for other recorders, refer to the manuals that are provided along with the cameras. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs CONFIGURING CAMERAS FOR IP ENGINE The following table lists the special considerations for configuring some of the cameras for IP Engine. Streamer Type Fields GrandEye and Axis 240Q cameras • In the Video Channel Number box, type the input number for the streamer. The valid input number range between 1 to 6. • In the Resolution drop-down list, select the resolution. The selection of the resolution depends on the input number provided in the Video Channel Number box. The resolution that should be set in the Resolution box based on the input number provided is as follows. • • • 1 to 4 — VCam 5 — Panorama 6 — FishEye, VCam-FishEye Note: Selecting high resolution for all the streamers might disturb streaming. HCX A DVANCE S ETT INGS In the Resolution drop-down list, selecting a cropped resolution would not display a full field view. FOR C AMERAS C ONNECTED TO THE IP E NGINE The advance settings of IP Engine help you to configure record settings such as frame rate, deleting clips and pre-recording options. You can also set the camera control options such as PTZ settings and configure motion detection. You can configure the following settings for a camera that is connected to the IP Engine. • Record settings (For configuring the user activated and background/ continuous recording). See Configuring Record Settings for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information. • Camera control settings (For configuring the PTZ settings, camera control protocol, and VCL options). See Configuring Camera Control for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information. • Motion Detection settings (See Motion Detection Settings (Video Motion) for more information) and Object Tracking and Classification settings (For configuring the recording of video when motion is detected). See Object Tracking and Classification Settings for more information. • Schedules (For configuring the scheduled recording). See Schedules for more information. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 125 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs CONFIGURING RECORD SETTINGS ENGINE FOR THE CAMERAS CONNECTED TO THE IP Before you begin • Configure the camera settings. See Adding a Camera for more information. • Associate the recorders. See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information. To configure the record settings 1. Click the Advanced Settings tab. The Record Settings appear. 2. In the Record Settings area, select the Use same settings as live viewing check box to use the same settings as live viewing. 3. Configure the settings in the User or Intercom Activated area. The following table lists the settings in the User or Intercom Activated area. 4. 126 Settings Description Pre-record for The duration of video that the IP Engine keeps in memory. When user initiates the recording in viewer tab, the IP Engine inserts this pre-record segment at the start of the recording. Configuring a pre-record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the recording started. For example, if you set this to 10 seconds, the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording is activated. Record for Duration for which the recording is done after the user action. Record frame rate Frame rate at which the video is recorded for user activated recordings Archive after Period for which user-activated recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. To ensure that the clips are not deleted before archival, set the period lesser than the period in Delete after. The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends. Delete after The video clips stored for this period before being automatically deleted. The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends. Configure the settings in the Background Recording area. The following table lists the settings in the Background Recording area. Settings Description Start background recording To start the background/ continuous recording. Clip duration The duration of the video clips. The video captured during background recording is broken into numerous clips of the specified duration. Ensure that the duration result in clips of manageable size. Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 5. Settings Description Archive each clip after The period for which background recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete each clip after period otherwise the clips are deleted before they can be archived. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Delete each clip after The duration for which background recordings are stored before being automatically deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Configure the settings in the Macro Triggered Recording area. The following table lists the settings in Macro Triggered Recording area. Settings Description Pre-record for The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for event activated recordings. When event is activated and a recording is started, the IP engine inserts this pre-record segment at the start of the recording. Configuring a prerecord period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the event was activated. For example, if you set this to 10 seconds, the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated. Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded. Archive event after The period for which event-related recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete after period otherwise, the clips are deleted before they can be archived. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Delete event after The duration for which event-related recordings are stored before being automatically deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Archive low alarms after The period for which low alarm recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete low alarms after period otherwise, the clips are deleted before they can be archived. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Delete low alarms after The period for which low alarm recordings are stored before being deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Archive high alarms after The period for which high alarm recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete high alarms after period otherwise, the clips are deleted before they can be archived. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Delete high alarms after The period for which high alarm recordings are stored before being deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 127 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 6. Settings Description Archive urgent alarms after The period for which urgent alarm recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete urgent alarms after period otherwise, the clips are deleted before they can be archived. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Delete urgent alarms after The period for which urgent alarm recordings are stored before being deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Configure the settings in the I/O Activated area. The following table lists the settings in the I/O Activated area. Settings Description Pre-record for The duration of video that the IP Engine keeps in memory. When user initiates the recording in viewer tab, the IP Engine inserts this pre-record segment at the start of the recording. Configuring a pre-record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening before the recording started. For example, if you set this to 10 seconds, the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording is activated. Record for Duration for which the recording is done after the user action. Record frame rate Frame rate at which the video is recorded for user activated recordings Archive after Period for which user-activated recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. To ensure that the clips are not deleted before archival, set the period lesser than the period in Delete after. The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends. Delete after The video clips stored for this period before being automatically deleted. The period starts when the recording of the video clip ends. CONFIGURING CAMERA CONTROL ENGINE FOR THE CAMERAS CONNECTED TO THE IP You can configure PTZ settings, camera control protocol, and VCL options using the camera control option. Before you begin • Configure the camera settings. See Adding a Camera for more information. • Associate the recorders. See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information. To configure camera control 128 1. Click Advanced Settings tab, by default the Recorder Settings tab is displayed. 2. Click the Camera Control tab. The Camera Control settings appear. 3. Select the type of camera control protocol supported by the camera in the Camera control type list. The types include: MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs • Fixed Camera — no camera control • Honeywell KD6 (Pelco) • Honeywell KD6 (VCL) • Pelco Dome — supports Pelco P protocol • Sensormatic — supports Sensormatic RS - 485 protocol • Use streamer settings (The camera control drivers for some of the new Axis streamers such as the Axis 241S/SA, Axis 241Q/QA, and Axis 240Q, might need to be downloaded from the Axis Web site.) • VCL Orbiter Gold • VCL Orbiter Lite Note: 4. Selecting a control type other than fixed causes the PTZ settings to appear in the display area. Configure the PTZ settings. The following table lists the PTZ settings. Settings Description Pan speed (Only applicable to the PTZ live video controls and indicators.) Tilt speed Zoom speed Focus speed Iris speed These properties appear only if they are appropriate to the selected Camera Control Type. They specify the speed at which a user can change the camera’s movement or focus. The values range between 0 and 100. (The larger the value, the faster the camera movement/focus changes.) You need to optimize these values by testing the camera’s operation. Continuous Pan/Tilt speed The speed of the mouse and joystick controls. A higher speed results in the mouse or joystick shifting the camera’s pan and tilt faster. Camera hardware ID Identifies the camera on a multi-dropped cable. This must correspond to the value configured on the PTZ head. (Only applicable to Honeywell KD6 (Pelco) and Honeywell KD6 (VCL), Pelco Dome Camera Control Type, and VCL). 5. In the Home/Preset Tour box, select the required tour. Return to Home Preset box is enabled. 6. In the Return to Home Preset box, type a time in seconds to perform a tour and return to original position. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 129 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Note: The Presets section lists the number of presets and the tour name. If you select VCL Orbiter Gold or VCL Orbiter Lite in the Camera control type option, then the VCL options appear. Set the VCL options according to your requirement. The following table lists the VCL options and the instructions to set them. Settings Description Flip camera when tilt angle is at 90 degrees Select the check box to flip camera when tilt angle is 90 degrees Allow Digital Zoom Select the check box to allow digital zoom for the camera. Enable infrared sensitive mode in low light Select the check box to enable infrared sensitive mode for the camera when there is low light. 1. In the VCL Tours section, select the required tour from the Tours list. 2. Click New button to create new tours. MOTION DETECTION SETTINGS (VIDEO MOTION) Configuring motion detection involves defining one or more Region of Interest (ROI) in the field of view. Rectangles or polygons are drawn in the field of view to specify the regions of interest, and then the motion detection algorithm is tuned within those regions. Some of the considerations while configuring motion detection are: • If the streamer supports streamer-based motion detection, use it to reduce the load on the computer. • Motion detection recording and alarming is disabled while you are tuning motion detection (when you click Start Tuning). • If you select the Premium algorithm, the algorithm uses the first 20 frames to learn the statistics of the field of view, and the next 60 frames to set up the information learned during the first 20 frames. Therefore motion is not detected in the field of view during the first 80 frames. Before you begin • Configure the camera settings. See Adding a Camera for more information. • Associate the recorders. See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information. To configure the motion detection 130 1. Click the Advance Settings tab by default the Record Settings tab appears. 2. Click the Video Analytics tab. 3. Select the Video Analytics enabled check box. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4. Use the General properties to set the algorithm, motion server, and detection type. The following table lists the General properties and the instructions to configure them. Settings Description Algorithm Select Standard (Low CPU) or Premium (High CPU). Motion Server The Video Analytics Server you want to use to run the algorithm. (Only applicable to server-side algorithms.) Detection Type Select: • Continuous - 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Scheduled - the time(s) at which motion detection is enabled is specified in one or more schedules. See Schedules for more information. Note: Changing from Scheduled to Continuous deletes all video analytics schedules for the camera. The default is Continuous. 5. Click Start tuning. 6. Use the ROI to define one or more regions. See Defining Regions of Interest for more information. 7. Use the tuning properties to set motion detection frame rate and sensitivity. Check if the algorithm is operating as required. (Tuning the algorithm’s operation is typically an iterative task - you may have to change the values several times before you achieve satisfactory results.) See Tuning Properties for more information. 8. When satisfactory results are obtained, click Finish tuning. 9. Configure the When motion is detected properties as required. See When Motion is Detected Properties for more information. 10. Click Save. D EFINI NG R EGIONS OF I NTEREST To define a rectangular region of interest 1. Click and drag the pointer diagonally over the area that you want the IP engine to track and classify objects. As you drag, a box marks the region of interest. To define an irregular region of interest 1. Move the pointer to the location of the first vertex, and then click to mark its location. 2. Drag the mouse pointer to the place you want to add the next vertex and release the mouse button. 3. Click and drag the mouse pointer to the place you want to add the next vertex and release the mouse button. 4. Repeat step 3 for each of the other vertex, (you can have up to 10 vertices), except the last vertex. 5. Double-click to mark the last vertex or drag the mouse pointer to the first vertex of the shape and release the mouse button. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 131 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Note: To cancel the task of defining a region of interest, right-click or press the ESC key. To select a region of interest Click the region of interest to select it. (If regions of interest overlap, click the edge of the region to select.) To modify a region of interest 1. Click the region of interest to select it. Selection handles appear. 2. Drag a selection handle as required. The vertices move as you drag. To modify an irregular region of interest 1. Double-click at the point where you want to add a new vertex. 2. Drag the selection handle to create the new shape for region of interest. To move a region of interest 1. Click the region of interest to select it. 2. Drag it to its new location. Note: Dragging it by a selection handle might change its shape. To delete a vertice • Click the vertice and drag it onto the vertice next to it to merge them. To delete a region of interest 1. Click the region of interest to select it. 2. Press DELETE. T UNING P ROPERTIES Algorithm tuning properties involves configuring the motion detection by a camera depending on the frame rate of the motion, size of the object involved in motion and speed of the object involved in motion. 1. Click Start tuning, and then configure the settings for Standard (Low CPU) or Premium (High CPU) as per the algorithm you selected. Standard (Low CPU) algorithm 132 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs The following table list the Standard (low CPU) algorithm tuning properties. Settings Description Detection frame rate The frame rate you want the motion detection algorithm to detect a motion. (An object is considered to be “moving” if it moves inside a region of interest for at least two consecutive frames.) The chance of motion being detected depends on: • The frame rate—a higher frame rate increases the chance of motion being detected. • The size of the region of interest—the larger the region of interest, the longer the object takes to move through it, increasing the chance of motion being detected. • The speed of the object—the faster the object moves the shorter is the amount of time required to pass through the region of interest, thereby decreasing the chance of motion being detected. The default frame rate is 3 frames per second. A higher frame rate increases the chance of a fast moving object being detected. The bandwidth at which the frames delivered is displayed. If you are using HNVE130A MPEG streams, VMD uses Iframes for video motion detection and the options available for this option are Every I-frame and Every second I-frame and so on. When you select this option, the frame rate given to the VMD algorithm is displayed. Note: This setting has a high impact on the loading of the server (the higher the frame rate the higher the load on the CPU) and impacts the bandwidth used by the streamer when motion detection is activated. Optimize for movement (Applicable to the selected region of interest). Select the option you want to optimize the algorithm to detect the movement of any object. The options are: • In any direction (the default) Sensitivity • Across field of view • To/from camera (Applicable to the selected region of interest). Indicates how sensitive the algorithm must be to detect movement. Values are between 1 and 100 and the higher the value the more sensitive to motion. The default is 40%. Note: If the viewing resolution is changed, it affects this value. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 133 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs P REMIUM (H I GH CPU) A LGORITHM The following table list the Premium (High CPU) algorithm tuning properties. Settings Description Detection frame rate The detection frame rate description for Premium (High CPU) Algorithm is same as Standard (Low CPU) algorithm. Refer page 132. Sensitivity Specify whether the camera is aimed at an Indoors (High) or Outdoors (Low) scene. The default is Indoors (High). Sub-sampling Reduces the effective resolution of the image used for detecting motion. The greater the level of sub-sampling, the lower the load on the CPU required for motion detection. The values are: • 1—no sub-sampling (the resolution of the image is not changed) • 2—the resolution of the image and the load on the CPU are halved • 4—the resolution of the image and the load on the CPU are quartered The default is 2. Note: Increasing the sub-sampling might increase the chance of a false detection. Minimum object size Select the minimum size of an object for which motion can be detected, expressed in pixels. The minimum size you can specify is limited by the subsampling property, according to the following formula: 4 x (sub-sampling)2. For example, if you set sub-sampling to 2, the minimum object size you can specify is 16 pixels. The maximum object size is 64 pixels. If objects in the scene you want to detect motion are large, increasing the minimum object size can prevent false detections caused by small movement changes 134 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs W HEN M OTI ON IS D ETECTED P ROPERTIES Specify the When Motion is Detected properties as follows: Settings Description Consider motion finished after The length of time, after motion was last detected, that motion is considered to have stopped. This property affects When motion is detected properties as follows: • A new alarm is not generated before this time has expired. Generate an alarm • A new recording does not start before this time has expired. If you set the Record for property to until motion finishes, recording continues until this time has expired. • Video is not resent to a Station until this time has expired. • If you have a lot of false detections occurring, increasing this value helps. • If your motion detection recordings are configured to stop when the motion stops, and does not stop as anticipated, decreasing this value might help. When checked, sends an alarm to the EBI, Experion, or HSS server at the specified Alarm level when motion is detected. Note: The alarm is not latched to a point. Alarm level The alarm level can be of type: • Urgent • High • Low • Journal (the default) All alarms, except Journal, appear in Station’s Alarm Summary. Journal alarms do not appear in the Station Alarm Summary, but are written to the event file and appear in the Event Summary. Ensure that all operators who are required to view these alarms have access to the EBI, Experion, or HSS system area in which the alarms are being raised. This area is the same as the camera’s configured area. Start a recording MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Starts a recording when motion is detected. Selecting this allows you to specify Prerecord for, Record for, Record frame rate, and Archive after, and Delete after properties for video clips created when motion is detected. 135 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Settings Description Pre-record for The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for motion detection recordings. When motion is detected and a recording is started, the IP engine inserts this pre-record segment at the start of the recording. Configuring a pre-record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening immediately before the motion was detected and a recording started. For example, if you set this to 10 seconds, the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated. Record for The length of time (in seconds) recording takes place after motion is detected. If you select Until motion finishes, the recording continues until no motion is detected in the scene for the length of time specified in the Consider motion finished after property. Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded for motion detection recordings. Archive after The period for which a motion detection recording is available for playback before being archived. The duration commences at the video clip’s end date and time. Delete after The duration for which motion detection recordings are stored before being automatically deleted. The duration commences at the clip’s end date and time. Send video to station If selected, video is automatically shown in the specified Station(s) when motion is detected. If a Station has an alarm monitor, the video is displayed on the alarm monitor. Station number The number of the Station that the video is sent to, if you select the Send video to Station(s) check box. All stations in area The area containing the Stations that the video is sent to, if you select the Send video to Station(s) check box. OBJECT TRACKING AND CLASSIFICATION SETTINGS Configuring object tracking and classification involves defining one or more Regions of Interest (ROI) - rectangles or polygons in the field of view, and then tuning the operation of the associated tracking algorithm within those regions. In addition to defining the ROI, you must define: 136 • The minimum size of the object to be tracked. • The condition that an object must meet for each region of interest before the network recorder takes the specified action—such as raising an alarm or starting a recording. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Before you begin • Configure the camera settings. See Adding a Camera for more information. • Associate the recorders. See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information. To configure object tracking and classification 1. Click the Advance Settings tab. The Record Settings appears. 2. Click the Video Analytics tab. 3. Select the Video Analytics enabled check box. 4. Use the General properties to set the algorithm, motion server, and detection type. The following table lists the General properties and the instructions to configure them. Settings Description Algorithm Select Standard (Low CPU) or Premium (High CPU). Motion Server The Video Analytics Server you want to use to run the algorithm. (Only applicable to server-side algorithms.) Detection Type Select: • Continuous - 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Scheduled - the time(s) at which motion detection is enabled is specified in one or more schedules. See Schedules for more information. Note: Changing from Scheduled to Continuous deletes all video analytics schedules for the camera. The default is Continuous. 5. Click Start tuning. 6. Use the regions of interest to define one or more regions. See Defining Regions of Interest for more information. 7. Define the Minimum size of an object that is to be tracked. See Defining the Minimum Object Size for more information. 8. Use the tuning properties to set motion detection frame rate and sensitivity. See Tuning Properties for Object Tracking for more information. 9. Click Finish tuning if the tuning properties are satisfactory. 10. Configure the conditions for current ROI that moving objects must meet for each region of interest. See Defining Conditions for more information. D EFINI NG THE M I NIMUM O BJECT S IZE The minimum object size that is tracked by the algorithm is defined by a magenta rectangle. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 137 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Note: The position of the rectangle is not relevant for defining the minimum object size. To define the minimum object size 138 1. Select the rectangle. Its selection handles appear. 2. Drag a selection handle until the rectangle is of the required size and shape. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs T UNING P ROPERTIES FOR O BJECT T RACKING Settings Description Detection frame rate The rate at which you want the algorithm to run. The default is 5 frames per second. This setting has a high impact on the loading of the server. The higher the frame rate, the higher the load on the CPU. It impacts the bandwidth used by the streamer when object tracking is activated. The chance of motion being detected depends on: • The frame rate—a higher frame rate increases the chance of motion being detected. • The size of the region of interest—the larger the region of interest, the longer the object takes to move through it, increasing the chance of motion being detected. • The speed of the object—the faster the object moves the shorter is the amount of time required to pass through the region of interest, thereby decreasing the chance of motion being detected. If you are using HNVE130A MPEG streamers, AVPS uses I-frames for video motion detection and the options available for this option are Every I-frame and Every second I-frame and so on. When you select this option, the frame rate given to the AVPS algorithm is displayed. Sensitivity Indicates whether the scene is indoor or outdoor. Shadow correction If there are many shadows in the scene, turn shadow correction on, to reduce the risk of false detections. Turning this setting on, has a high impact on the loading of the server. Processing Type Indicates whether the algorithm analyzes the entire image (Full Frame) or only the regions of interest drawn (ROI Only). Full Frame processing provides more accurate results— especially for small regions of interest—because it can track objects over the whole frame. The larger the area in which the object might move and the longer it takes to move in the area, the camera has to classify more information and the detection is more accurate. However, it does increase the load on the CPU. Note: Even if you select Full Frame, the conditions (and associated responses, such as raising alarms) only apply if the object enters a region of interest. D EFINI NG C ONDIT IONS You can define the condition or conditions that the moving objects must meet for each region of interest. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 139 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs To define a condition 1. In the Region Name box, type the name of the region. 2. Click New. A condition row is added to list. 3. Define the condition by selecting appropriate values for the three condition properties: Object type, Behavior and Direction. The following table lists the settings to define the condition. Note: As you select a value for each property, the condition in the list is updated. Settings Description Object type The type of object you want the algorithm to detect. Valid types are: • person • vehicle • other Object • any Object When any Object is selected, it detects any moving object greater than the minimum object size. Note: You cannot select Object type when using the object tracking algorithm. It is available only when using the object tracking and classification algorithm. Behavior The object’s behavior that triggers the event. Valid behaviors are: • Enter—enters the region • Exit—exits the region • Any behavior—matches any behavior Start and stop are only applicable if the Processing type property is set to Full Frame. Direction The direction in which the object must move to trigger the event (the exact wording depends on whether you set behavior to enter or exit): • to/from the Right • to/from the Left • to/from the Bottom • to/from the Top • any Direction Note: Direction is with respect to the field of view—not the ROI, which may have an irregular shape. 140 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4. Configure the settings to define what should happen when an object satisfies the condition. The following table lists the settings and their description. Settings Description Generate an alarm Sends an alarm to the EBI, Experion, or HSS server at the specified Alarm level when an object satisfies the condition. Note: The alarm is not latched to a point. Alarm level. The level of the alarms that are generated: • Urgent • High • Low • Journal (the default) All alarms, except for Journal, appear in Station’s Alarm Summary. Journal alarms does not appear in the Station Alarm Summary, but are written to the event file and appear in the Event Summary. Ensure that all operators who are required to view these alarms have access to the EBI, Experion, or HSS system area in which the alarms are being raised. Start a recording Selecting this allows you to specify Prerecord for, Record for, Record frame rate, and Archive after and Delete after properties for video clips created when an object satisfies the condition. Pre-record for The duration of video that the IP engine keeps in memory for motion detection recordings. When motion is detected and a recording is started, the IP engine inserts this pre-record segment at the start of the recording. The pre-record period on the recording allows you to view what was happening immediately before the motion was detected and a recording started. For example if you set this to 10 seconds, the recording shows the 10 seconds of video before the recording was activated. Record for The length of time (in seconds), the recording takes place after motion is detected. If you select Until motion finishes, the recording continues until no motion is detected in the scene for the length of time specified in the Consider motion finished after property. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 141 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Settings Description Record frame rate The frame rate at which video is recorded for motion detection recordings. Archive after The period for which a motion detection recording is available for playback before being archived. The duration commences at the video clip’s end date and time. If set, this must be less than the Delete after period. Delete after The duration for which motion detection recordings are stored before being automatically deleted. The duration commences at the video clip’s end date and time. Send video to station(s) If selected, video is automatically shown in the specified Station(s) when an object satisfies the condition. If a Station has an alarm monitor, the video is displayed on the alarm monitor. Station number The number of the Station that the video is sent to, if you select the Send video to Station(s) check box. All stations in area The area containing the Stations that the video is sent, if you select the Send video to Station(s) check box. Do not raise repetitive events for the same object for The length of time, after the object has moved outside the region of interest, new alarms, recordings and video streams to Station are reserved. This property affects the other properties in this table as follows: • A new alarm is not generated until this time has expired. • A new recording does not start until this time has expired. In addition, if you set the Record for property to While object in the region, recording continues until this time has expired. • Video is not re-sent to a Station until this time has expired. SCHEDULES A schedule defines the date and times when recording and video analytics (motion detection, and object tracking and classification) functions are enabled for a camera. A recurring schedule is a schedule that occurs at regular intervals. C REATING A S CHEDULE You can create schedules for the camera to record video at recurring intervals and to enable camera to record motion detection and object tracking at a stipulated time. 142 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs To create a schedule 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Inputs. The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the camera or select the camera, and then click Update. The general settings for the camera appear. 4. Click the Advance Settings tab. 5. Click the Schedules tab, and then click Create a new schedule. 6. Configure the Schedule Details according to your requirement. The following table lists the settings for configuring a schedule. Type Settings Type The type of schedule: • Recording—records video as specified in the schedule. • Start Video Analytics—controls when video analytics is enabled for the camera. End The date and time at which the schedule starts and stops. To specify the time, click each unit (hour and minute) and type the appropriate value. Note Description or comments about the schedule. Frame rate (Only applies to Recording schedules.) The frame rate at which the video is recorded. Archive after (Only applies to Recording schedules.)The period for which scheduled recordings are available for playback before they are automatically archived. If set, this must be less than the Delete after period. Delete after (Only applies to Recording schedules.) The time the recording is stored before it is automatically deleted. Recurrence Details Recurring End after Select No, if you want only one recording. Otherwise, select how often you want the recording to take place: • Daily • Weekly • Monthly (Only applicable if you select recurring.) If you want to create a recurring schedule that never expires, you must consider using background recording. The number of days before the schedule expires. 7. Click OK. The schedule is created. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 143 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Note: D ELET ING Clicking Cancel terminates the configured schedule. A S CHEDULE You can delete a schedule for the camera when you do not want to record video at recurring intervals and disable camera from recording motion detection and object tracking at a stipulated time. To delete a schedule 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Cameras branch. 4. The Cameras screen appears in the display area. 5. Double-click the camera or select the camera, and then click Update.The general settings for the camera appear. 6. Click the Advance Settings tab. 7. Click the Schedules tab. 8. Select the start day for the schedule in Schedules on. The schedules for that day appear in the list. Ensure that you are deleting the right schedule. 9. Select the schedule you want to delete from the list. The schedule’s details appear. 10. Click Delete, and then click Yes in response to the confirmation prompt. To delete a recurring schedule 1. Select the start day for the schedule in Schedules on. The schedules for that day appear in the list. 2. Select the schedule you want to delete from the list. The details of the schedule appear. 3. Click Delete only if you want to delete the schedule occurrence on that day. If you want to delete all occurrences of the schedule, click Delete all occurrences. (This button appears only when you select a recurring schedule.) ASSOCIATING A SWITCHER TO A VIDEO INPUT Switchers are devices that route multiple video inputs to multiple video outputs. You can associate video input devices like analog cameras, smart device, VCRs, and so on to a switcher. You can also configure switcher parameters like switcher input number, macros, and slot number. CONFIGURING 144 THE SWITCHER SETTINGS 1. In the Connected to section, click Switcher. The Switcher drop-down list is enabled. 2. Select the required switcher. The Switcher Settings appear. 3. In the Input Number box, type the video input number on the subrack. 4. In the Device Macro Flags section, select the required fields to set the macro flag to True. This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device. Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True. 5. Under Pretext Settings, in the Pretext SubrackID box, type the address of the subrack which contains the text insertion card. The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 - 799, a value of 0 indicates pretext is not used. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 6. In the Pretext SlotNumber, type slot number within the pretext subrack where the text insertion card resides. The valid range of slot numbers is 1 - 32. 7. In the X and Y boxes, type the location of the camera text to be displayed on the monitor. Valid positions are 1-13. CONFIGURING CONTROL SETTINGS • Configure the Control Settings for the switchers. C O N F I G U R I N G A D VA N C E D S E T T I N G S 1. Note: 2. FOR M AX P R O AND VIDEOBLOX Click the Advanced Settings tab. The Advanced Settings screen appears. In the Primary Subrack ID, the ID that is associated while adding a switcher is displayed by default. In the ByPass Subrack ID box, type the address of the subrack which must be bypassed when selecting the current video input device. Note: For VideoBlox subrack, the Bypass subrack ID value must be 1-16, depending on the input device number. For the first 1-255 physical inputs, the bypass ID is 1, and for the next 1-255 inputs, the bypass ID is 2, and so on. 3. In the Combiner Subrack ID box, type the ID for cascading and combining configurations. In a cascading configuration consisting of three subracks, the Combiner Subrack ID contains the address of the second subrack that is to be bypassed when selecting the current video input device.The valid address values range from 0 (signifying no cascading or combining are used) through 99. 4. In the Combiner Input Number box, type the address to which the preselector subrack for the current video input is connected. 5. In the Dynamic Equalization box, type the value between 1 and 8 to represent the cable length between the video input and the switcher. It serves to improve video quality by compensating for cable related transmission losses. Note: 6. The values 1 - 8 represent one hundred meters of RG-59/BU units coaxial cable. In the Video Fail Slot box, type the slot number where the video fail detector module is located. Note: The valid subrack slot numbers are 11 - 14. HD Series subracks (HMX32128) perform video fail detection on the HMX128 subrack controller card. This is mapped to pseudo slots as follows: MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 145 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Note: Video Input Video Fail Slot 1 - 32 11 33-64 12 65-96 13 97-128 14 For VideoBlox subrack, the Video fail slot must be 1. Enter 0, if video fail detection is not required. 7. In the Start Macro box, type the desired macro number to execute Start Macro, whenever a video alarm condition is detected for the corresponding video input device. 8. In the End Macro box, type the desired macro number. The End Macro is executed whenever the video alarm condition is cleared. CONTROL SETTINGS 1. Select the Locked check box to prevent the user to control the device. 2. From the PTZ Done By drop-down list, select the required PTZ type. The following table lists the PTZ types and steps to configure their settings. 146 Type Settings Device This setting is used when the PTZ camera is controlled using the recorder. The PTZ settings are done using the local applications of the recorder except for IP Engine. To configure PTZ settings for a IP Engine camera, see Configuring Camera Control for the Cameras Connected to the IP Engine for more information. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Type Settings Serial Port The followings settings are used when a PTZ camera is controlled by MAXPIT or MATPIT. a. In the Select Serial Port drop-down list, select the serial port. b. In the Source Control ID box, a default ID is displayed. c. In the Source Control Slot box, type the slot number within the control subrack where the controller for the current video input device resides. Note: Valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks and 1 – 8 for HD Series subracks. Within subracks such as HMX1132 and HMX1600, the control slot is the physical slot where the controller card resides. Whereas within HD Series subracks (HMX32128) device control and I/O functions are mapped to pseudo slots as all of these functions exist on the subrack controller card (HMX128) located in slot 0. For VideoBloxsubrack, the control slot number should be greater than zero.Valid range: 1 to 4. d. In the Offset box, type the ID number of the PTZ site receiver connected to that camera. Note: The valid range for site IDs is 1 – 16. A 0 indicates that a hardwired relay output module is being used in the subrack slot for controlling that camera. Offset is the hardware address configured in the PTZ camera. Switcher The followings settings are used when a PTZ camera is controlled by a matrix switcher. a. In the Select Switcher drop-down list, select the switcher. b. In the Source Control ID box, a default ID is displayed. Note: The valid range for Control ID is 1 – 799, a value of 0 indicates no control capability for the device. c. In the Source Control Slot box, type the slot number within the control subrack where the controller for the current video input device resides. Note: Valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks and 1 – 8 for HD Series subracks. Within subracks such as HMX1132 and HMX1600, the control slot is the physical slot where the controller card resides. Whereas within HD Series subracks (HMX32128) device control and I/O functions are mapped to pseudo slots as all of these functions exist on the subrack controller card (HMX128) located in slot 0.For VideoBlox subrack, the control slot number should be greater than zero. Valid range: 1 to 4. d. In the Offset box, type the ID number of the PTZ site receiver connected to that camera. Note: The valid range for site IDs is 1 – 16. A 0 indicates that a hardwired relay output module is being used in the subrack slot for controlling that camera. Offset is the hardware address configured in the PTZ camera. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 147 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 3. In the PTZ Viewer Sensitivity drop-down list, select the required sensitiveness. 4. In the Available Control Options area, select the options to enable or disable the control functions. The available control functions vary between the different types of video input device as shown in the following figures. The following tables lists the available control functions for different types of video input devices. Camera VCR or LoggingVCR or Standby VCR Standard Device or Smart Device Wash/Wipe Record Output1 Manual Iris Play Outpu2 Pan Rewind Output3 Tilt Fast Forward Output4 Focus Slow Output5 Zoom Pause Output6 Present View Eject Output7 Ext/Walk/Flashback Stop Output8 The following table lists the special considerations for configuring some of the cameras for IP Engine. Streamer Type Fields GrandEye and Axis 240Q cameras • In the Video Channel Number box, type the input number for the streamer. The valid input number range between 1 to 6. • In the Resolution drop-down list, select the resolution The selection of the resolution depends on the input number provided in the Video Channel Number box. The resolution that should be set in the Resolution box based on the input number provided is as follows. • • • 1 to 4 — VCam 5 — Panorama 6 — FishEye, VCam-FishEye Note: Selecting high resolution for all the streamers might disturb streaming. HCX 148 In the Resolution drop-down list, selecting a cropped resolution would not display a full field view. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A VIDEO INPUT You can associate one or more events to a video input. An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the video input. For certain events, you can also associate event attributes. For example, for an Encoder Disabled event, you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name, Encoder ID and so on. For every attribute that you associate, you can set a value based on which the event is triggered. In the above example, you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A. When this event is associated to the video input, an alarm is raised when the event “Encoder Disabled” occurs for the Encoder Name “Encoder A”. Attributes are available only for certain events. These events can be associated to a video input multiple times. The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window. To view the event attributes of an alarm, right-click the alarm, and then click Show Details. Before you begin • Add a Video Input ASSOCIATING EVENTS To associate events to video inputs 1. Click the Events tab. The screen displays the associated events, if any. Figure 4-18 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Camera Events 149 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 2. Click Associate. The Select from List dialog box appears. Figure 4-19 Select from List 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate events to video input • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. To add Event Groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to add the Event Group. 2. Double-click the cell under the Event Group column. Select EventGroup dialog box appears. 3. Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add. 4. Click OK. Note: You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To disable an event 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable. 2. Click the cell under the Disabled column. A drop-down list is enabled. 3. Select True. To assign severity level 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level. 2. Click the cell under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. To enter remarks 150 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks. 2. Click the cell under the Remarks column and type the remarks. To assign macros 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros. 2. Click the cell under the Start Procedure column, and then type the required macro. 3. Click the cell under the End Procedure column, and then type the required macro. ASSOCIATING EVENT ATTRIBUTES Before you begin • Associate events. To associate event attributes 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes. The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane. 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event attributes from a video input • Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute, and then click Remove. The following tables describes the event name, event attributes, and their description. Recorder (to which camera is connected) Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description IP Engine CameraVideoLoss Ok StreamerVideoInp utNumber Numeric values from 1 to maximum channels supported by streamer. CameraVideoLoss Alarm StreamerVideoInp utNumber Numeric values from 1 to maximum channels supported by streamer. CameraServerCha nged OldCamServer Machine name of the Camera Server. NewCamServer Machine name of the Camera Server. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 151 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs The following tables describes the event name, event attributes, and their description related to cameras with analytics. Events Event Attributes Attribute Description Video lost in analytics server Server name Server name Video restored in analytics server Server name Server name Camera Blind Detected Camera blind Camera blind in percentage Camera Blur Detected Camera blur Camera blur in percentage Scene changed Scene changed Scene changed in percentage Car counted in lane Object count Car count Car entered restricted zone Zone information Zone information Car exited restricted zone Zone information Zone information Car parked in handicapped zone Zone information Zone information Entered target zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object entered restricted zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Person counted as entering Object count Object count Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Object count Object count Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Person entered restricted zone Zone information Zone information Person exited restricted zone Zone information Zone information Person loitering in restricted zone Zone information Zone information Staying in target zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Person counted as exiting 152 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Events Event Attributes Attribute Description Object trespassing line Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Person trespassing line Zone information Zone information Car trespassing line Zone information Zone information Object started moving in wrong direction Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object stopped moving in wrong direction Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Person started moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person stopped moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Car started moving in wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person on fence line Zone information Zone information Car made an illegal U-turn Zone information Zone information Car pulled off the road Zone information Zone information Person running in the wrong direction Zone information Zone information Person started running Zone information Zone information Person stopped running Zone information Zone information Car needs assistance Zone information Zone information Object entered Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object exited Object stopped Object started moving MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 153 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Events Event Attributes Attribute Description Object merged Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Object entered sterile zone Object type Object type Zone information Zone information Car entered sterile zone Zone information Zone information Person entered sterile zone Zone information Zone information Objects split People passed by ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO INPUTS You can associate partition to cameras. Associating a partition to a camera restricts a nonassociated user of the partition from viewing the camera or changing the settings of the camera. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to video inputs 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. Figure 4-20 154 Camera Partitions 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4. Click OK. The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions. To disassociate partitions to camera • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING ANALYTICS Before you begin Add Analytics Server. See Adding an Analytics Server for more information. To associate analytics 1. Click the Analytics tab. Figure 4-21 Camera Analytics 2. Select Enable Analytics. 3. From the Analytics Server drop-down list, select the required analytics server. 4. From the Package Type drop-down list, select the required package data. 5. In the resolution settings, select Enable QCIF to set the QCIF resolution if required. 6. Click Save. FILTERING AND GROUPING THE VIDEOINPUT(S) Filter feature enables you to filter and group the required number of video input columns. Filtering video inputs can be performed in two ways. a. By dragging and dropping specific column headers to group with the other columns. b. By defining the row values to display the required columns. To filter and group the video input(s) columns 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the VideoInput(s) node. The VideoInput(s) screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 155 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Figure 4-22 4. Drag and drop the required columns in upper header area to view the corresponding column details. Or Right-click on the required column name and then choose Group by or Ungroup by option. Example 1: If you want to view the details of only VideoInputName, Type and Address at once, drag and drop the columns one after another to the upper header area as shown below. Figure 4-23 156 Video Inputs Filtering Video Inputs Grouping MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Example 2: If you want to group the columns by VideoInputName then right- click on the Name column and then choose Group by “VideoInputName” option as shown below. The column arrangement is displayed a shown below. 5. Click under each node to expand and view the details. Similarly repeat the step 4 to add more column headers. To remove the column headers from the Grouped By area • Drag the required columns from the Grouped By area and drop into the actual header area. To filter the video inputs(s) columns by defining the value 1. Click the Configurator tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 157 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Video Inputs(s)node. The Video Inputs(s) screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-24 4. 158 Click Video Inputs(s) Screen . Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 5. Under Select All, select the required check boxes to display the row elements as shown below. OR In the Show rows with value that, perform the following: a. Select the required option from the Is equal to drop-down list. b. Type the required value corresponding to your selection. c. Select the required option from the AND/Or drop- down list. d. Select the required option from the Is equal to drop-down list corresponding to your option selected. e. Type the required value corresponding to your selections. f. Click Filter. The video inputs(s) columns based on your requirement is displayed. For example If you define a row value as: Value Start with B4 And that Contains H4D55IP model camera then the result of the filter is displayed as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 159 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Figure 4-25 Defining Filter To Clear or Reset the filter • Click Clear Filter in the dialog box Or Click Reset Filter to reset all the filters. SORTING VIDEO INPUT(S) Sorting feature enables you to sort the required columns ascending or descending. It also allows you to group or ungroup based on the specific column. To sort the columns ascending or descending 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area. 3. Click the Video Input(s) branch. The Video Input(s) screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-26 160 Video Input(s) Screen MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs 4. Right click on the required column name. Sorting options are displayed as shown below. 5. Choose the required Ascending or Descending option. The columns information is arranged accordingly as shown in figure 23. CHOOSE THE COLUMNS TO DISPLAY You can choose the attributes of video input(s) to display in the screen. To choose the columns to display 1. Right click on any column header and then point to Choose Columns. The available column names are displayed. 2. Select or clear the required column. Based on the selection the column table are displayed. UPDATING A VIDEO INPUT You can update the camera to change the existing settings and configure new settings. To update a video input 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Inputs. The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the video input or select the check box corresponding to the video input, and then click Update. 4. The Video Input screen appears. Update the required settings. 5. Click Save. DELETING A VIDEO INPUT You can delete a video input when you do not want to record video from a site or do not want the display of a live video from a site. All the associations made to the video input are removed, when you delete it. Before you begin MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 161 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs • Disassociate Partitions. See Associating Partitions to Video Inputs for more information. • Disassociate Events. See Associating Events for more information. To delete a video input 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Inputs. The Video Inputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the video input that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE 1. In the Video Input Details area, specify the following video input device details. 2. Repeat the step 2 through step 5 of section Adding a Camera on page 119 3. Click Save. ADDING A VIDEO INPUT DEVICE (DIGITAL INPUT TRUNK) 1. 2. 162 In the Video Input Details area, specify the following video input device details. Field Description Video Input Name Type a video input device name. The video input device name appears in the devices window making it easy to select. Description Type a description for the camera. Callup Number A unique number that identifies the camera. By default, the next available number is allocated. The operators can use the number to quickly view the video from the video input device using the virtual keyboard. See About Virtual Keyboard in Monitoring a Site section. Site Location of the camera. In the Alternative Settings area, specify the following details. Field Description Alternate Camera Type the number of the camera that has to be selected as an alternate camera when ALT key is pressed on the keyboard. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 9999. Zero (0) is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Inputs Field Description Alternate Camera View Type the camera view number or preset number to select the preset view for the alternate camera. Pressing the 'ALT' key not only displays the alternate camera, but also move it automatically, to the designated VIEW preset. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. 3. In the Connected To section, select Switcher. See Associating a Switcher to a Video Input for more information. 4. From the Switcher drop-down list, select the required switcher. Specify the following details in the switcher settings. Settings Description Primary Subrack ID The ID that is associated while adding a switcher is displayed by default. Input Number Type the video input number on the subrack. 5. From the Digital Monitor -TV out, select the required monitor. 6. In the Connected To section, select the Recorder. See Associating Recorder to a Video Input Device for more information. Note: Only Enterprise recorder can be associated. 7. Select Link if you wan to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video input device on the network. 8. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 163 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs VIDEO OUTPUTS ................................................................. You can add various video output devices in MAXPRO VMS. You can add digital and analog monitors. The following types of video output devices are supported. • Monitor — Analog and Digital. • Standard Device — other devices, freeze frames and so on. • Smart Device— devices such as multiplexers. • Trunk - trunk video input (from a networked system). • VCR — (video cassette recorder) - dedicated or Dub VCR. • Standby VCR — Standby VCR as used in VCR Management. • Digital Output Trunk — to view analog camera video. Analog monitors are connected to the switchers and display video from analog cameras. The digital monitors are connected to the client workstations. Each client workstation can connect up to four digital monitors. VIDEO OUTPUTS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to monitors. Monitors associated to a partition can be viewed or managed only by the users who are associated with it. VIDEO OUTPUTS AND EVENT GROUPS An event group is a set of events that occur on video devices. Event Groups are associated to monitors. An alarm is generated, When any event related to the monitor in the event group occurs. VIDEO OUTPUTS AND JOYSTICK CONTROLLER Joystick controllers are associated to Monitors. Monitors associated to a joystick controller can be controlled by a user who is also associated with the joystick controller. ADDING VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add digital and analog video outputs like monitors, smart devices, standard device, trunk, VCR, Standby VCR to display video. Video output devices like digital monitors are connected to the client workstations. The video output devices analog monitors are connected to the video matrix switchers. Before you begin • Add Site. • Add Switcher (to associate the analog monitor). • Add Workstation (to associate the digital monitor). • Add Partition. • Update Joystick Controller. By default, a site and partition are available. You can associate the video outputs to them or create new. To add a video output 1. 164 Click the Configurator tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Outputs. The Video Output screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-27 Video Outputs 3. Click Add. The Monitor screen appears by default. Figure 4-28 4. Monitors From the Device Type drop-down list, select the required device type. The currently supported video output device types are listed in the following table. Click the corresponding links in the device column list to refer to the instructions while adding. Video Input Device Description Monitor For details on configuring the monitor, see Adding Monitors. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 165 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs Video Input Device Description Standard Device For details on configuring the devices, see Adding a Video Output Device (Standard Device/Smart Device/VCR/ Standby VCR). Smart Device VCR Standby VCR Trunk For details on configuring the trunk, see Adding a Video Output Device (Trunk). Digital OutputTrunk For details on configuring the digital output trunk, see Adding a Video Output Device (Digital Output Trunk). 5. Associate Partition. See Associating Partitions to Video Outputs for more information. 6. Associate Joystick Controllers. See Associating Video Outputs to Joystick Controllers. 7. Associate Event Groups. See Associating Video Outputs to Event Groups for more information. 8. Click Save. ADDING MONITORS DIGITAL MONITOR To add a digital monitor 1. Select the Digital Monitor under Select Monitor Type. 2. In the VideoOutput Name box, type the name for the monitor. 3. In the Description box, type a description for the monitor. 4. In the Callup Number box, an automatic number is allocated by default. The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard. 5. In the Site box, select the location in which the monitor is used. 6. In the Default Salvo View drop-down list, select the default salvo view for the monitor. Note: This feature helps in configuring the wall mounted digital monitors in a site to display live video from the selected salvo views. 7. Select the Launch in Full Screen check box to launch the selected default salvo view in full screen mode, whenever the monitor is turned on. 8. In the Select Workstation drop-down list in Device Settings area, select the workstation to which the monitor is connected. 9. In the Workstation Monitor Number box, type the number configured for the monitor during workstation setup. 10. Click Save. 166 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs ANALOG MONITOR To add a analog monitor 1. Select the Analog Monitor under Select Monitor Type. 2. In the VideoOutput Name box, type the name for the monitor. 3. In the Description box, type a description for the monitor. 4. In the Callup Number box, an automatic number is allocated by default. The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard. 5. In the Site box, select the location in which the monitor is used. 6. Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video. Note: A monitor can be locked or unlocked by selecting or clearing the Lock VideoOutput check box. When a monitor is locked, no operations on the monitor are allowed including the multi monitor function. 7. In the Default Video Source box, type the camera callup number of the camera from which the live video is to be displayed. 8. In the Default Scan Sequence box, type the scan sequence number. 9. Select the Run Default Scan Sequence check box to automatically begin the default scan sequence. 10. In the Slot box, type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel. 11. Click Switcher, if the monitor is connected to a switcher, and then select the required switcher in the Switcher drop-down list. Specify the following details. Settings Description Text Inserter SubrackID Address of the subrack that contains the text insertion card is displayed by default. The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 – 799; a value of 0 indicates the text is not used. Text Inserter Slot Type the slot number within the subrack where the text insertion card resides. Note: The valid range of slot numbers is 1 – 32. HD Series hardware supports the MX208 8 channel video output/text insertion card, the text inserter slot entries correspond with the physical video output channel of the subrack. For VideoBloxsubrack, this number represents the physical input location of the video output channel. Valid range: 1 to 255 for VideoBlox. 12. Click the Net Device option, and then type the exact location and reference for the video 13. Select the LINK check box, if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video output device on the network. 14. In the Video Timeout box, type the display time-out period. The display time-out period can be set from 1-999 seconds. Enter a value zero if this function is not required. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 167 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 15. In the Text Line Settings area, select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text (Example, Warning message) is displayed. Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text (Example, Scan mode) is displayed. Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed. Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed. Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed. Note: Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings. 16. In the Text Display Settings area, select the check boxes to select the text display settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display. Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor. Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display. BackGround To apply background affect for the text display. Reverse Black/White To reverse black/white affect for the text display. Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor. Flash To display blinking text on the monitor. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings. 17. In the X and Y boxes, type a location for the text to appear on the monitor. Valid positions are 1 –13. X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively. 18. In the Device Macro Flags section, select the required fields to set the macro flag to True. This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device. Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True. 19. Click Save. 168 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (STANDARD DEVICE/SMART DEVICE/VCR/ STANDBY VCR) 1. In the VideoOutput Name box, type the name for the monitor. 2. In the Description box, type a description for the monitor. 3. In the Callup Number box, an automatic number is allocated by default. The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard. 4. In the Site box, select the location in which the monitor is used. 5. Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video. 6. In the Switcher Settings, type the Slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel 7. In the Text Inserter Subrack Settings area, click Switcher, if the monitor is connected to a switcher, and then select the required switcher in the Switcher drop-down list. Specify the following details. Settings Description Text Inserter SubrackID Address of the subrack that contains the text insertion card is displayed by default. The valid range of subrack addresses is 1 – 799; a value of 0 indicates the text is not used. Text Inserter Slot box Type the slot number within the subrack where the text insertion card resides. Note: The valid range of slot numbers is 1 – 32. HD Series hardware supports the MX208 8 channel video output/text insertion card, the text inserter slot entries correspond with the physical video output channel of the subrack. For VideoBloxsubrack, this number represents the physical input location of the video output channel. Valid range: 1 to 255 for VideoBlox. 8. In the Network Settings area: • 9. Select the Net Device option, and then type the exact location and reference for the video. • Select the LINK check box, if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current video output device on the network. In the Video Timeout box, type the display time-out period. The display time-out period can be set from 1-999 seconds. Enter a value zero if this function is not required. 10. In the Text Line Settings area, select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text (Example, Warning message) is displayed. Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text (Example, Scan mode) is displayed. Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed. Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 169 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs Option Description Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed. Note: Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings. 11. In the Text Display Settings area, select the check boxes to select the text display settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display. Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor. Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display. BackGround To apply background affect for the text display. Reverse Black/White To reverse black/white affect for the text display. Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor. Flash To display blinking text on the monitor. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings. 12. In the X and Y boxes, type a location for the text to appear on the monitor. Valid positions are 1 –13. X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively. 13. In the Device Macro Flags area, select the required Flag check boxes to set the macro flag to True. This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device. Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True. 14. Click Save. ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (TRUNK) 170 1. In the VideoOutput Name box, type the name for the monitor. 2. In the Description box, type a description for the monitor. 3. In the Callup Number box, an automatic number is allocated by default. The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard. 4. In the Site box, select the location in which the monitor is used. 5. Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video. 6. In the Slot box, type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel. 7. In the Video Timeout box, type the display time-out period. The display time-out period can be set from 1-999 seconds. Enter a value zero if this function is not required. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 8. In the Text Line Settings area, select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text (Example, Warning message) is displayed. Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text (Example, Scan mode) is displayed. Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed. Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed. Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed. Note: 9. Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings. In the Text Display Settings area, select the check boxes to select the text display settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display. Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor. Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display. BackGround To apply background affect for the text display. Reverse Black/White To reverse black/white affect for the text display. Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor. Flash To display blinking text on the monitor. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings. ADDING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE (DIGITAL OUTPUT TRUNK) 1. In the VideoOutput Name box, type the name for the monitor. 2. In the Description box, type a description for the monitor. 3. In the Callup Number box, an automatic number is allocated by default. The operator uses this number to select a monitor from the keyboard. 4. In the Site box, select the location in which the monitor is used. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 171 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 5. Select the Lock VideoOutput check box to lock monitor from displaying video. 6. In the Slot box, type the slot number to identify the slot location of the video output channel. 7. In the Video Timeout box, type the display time-out period. The display time-out period can be set from 1-999 seconds. Enter a value zero if this function is not required. 8. In the Text Line Settings area, select the check boxes according to your requirement to select text line settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Message Line Defines the line where the Message Line text (Example, Warning message) is displayed. Mode Line Defines the line where the Mode text (Example, Scan mode) is displayed. Source Description Defines the line the Video Input device description is displayed. Channel Description Defines the line where the description for the video device is displayed. Real Time Clock Defines the line the Real Time Clock is displayed. Note: 9. Selecting the Select All check box selects all the Text Line Settings. In the Text Display Settings area, select the check boxes to select the text display settings. The following table lists the options. Option Description Enhanced Card To enhance the appearance of the text display. Hidden Text To hide the text display on the monitor. Shadow To apply shadow affect for the text display. BackGround To apply background affect for the text display. Reverse Black/White To reverse black/white affect for the text display. Double Height To increase the height of text display on monitor. Flash To display blinking text on the monitor. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the Text Display Settings. 10. In the X and Y boxes, type a location for the text to appear on the monitor. Valid positions are 1 –13. X and Y coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical position respectively. 172 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs 11. In the Device Macro Flags section, select the required fields to set the macro flag to True. This field allows for definition of the default cold boot state of the macro flags for the current video input device. Click Select All to set all the macro flags to True. 12. Specify the Video Source in the Digital Settings tab. Option Description Video Source From the drop-down list, select the required video input device to display video. DELETING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE To delete a video output device 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Outputs. The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the video output device that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. UPDATING A VIDEO OUTPUT DEVICE You can update a video output device to change its association with a partition, joystick controller, and also to modify its settings. To update a video output 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Outputs. The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the video output you want to update. 4. Click Update. The settings for the video output appear. You can modify the settings. 5. Click Save. LOCKING THE DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR The analog monitor can be locked to display the video only from a particular camera and field of view. The operator cannot perform pan, tilt, or zoom using a monitor with locked display. To lock the display on a monitor 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Video Outputs. The Video Outputs screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the monitor you want to lock. 4. Double-click or click Update. The General Settings for the monitor appears. 5. Select the Lock VideoOuput check box. 6. Click Save. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO VIDEO OUTPUTS You can add partitions to video outputs. A video output associated with a partition can be viewed and managed by a user who is in turn associated with the partition. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 173 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Video Outputs Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to video outputs 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions. To disassociate partition from the video outputs • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO EVENT GROUPS You can associate event groups to video outputs. Associating video outputs to event groups allows display of alarms that are associated with the event group. Before you begin • Add Event Group. To associate event groups to video outputs 1. Click the Event Groups tab. The screen displays the associated event groups, if any. 2. Click Associate. The Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event groups from video outputs • Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING VIDEO OUTPUTS TO JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS You can associate Joystick Controllers to monitors. Monitors associated to a joystick controller can be controlled by a user who is also associated with the joystick controller. Before you begin • Update Joystick Controller. To associate joystick controllers to video output 1. Click the Joystick Controller tab. The screen displays the associated joysticks if any. 2. Click Associate. The Select Joystick Controller dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. Note: By default, all the joystick controllers are associated when a user is added. You can remove the joystick that you do not require. To disassociate Joystick Controller from a video output • 174 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name, and then click Remove. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Joystick Controllers JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS ................................................................. An Ultrakey keyboard is referred to as the joystick controller. Using the Ultra key keyboard, you can perform actions such as selecting a panel, PTZ operations, selecting a video source such as a camera, and others in the Viewer tab. You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform a particular action by associating intercept commands to them. For example, a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout. By default, 99 keyboards and a server keyboard is added. Only joystick controller 1 is enabled by default. The server keyboard cannot be deleted. JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND USERS Users are responsible for carrying out video surveillance operations in MAXPRO VMS. Joystick controllers are associated to users. Users associated to joystick controllers can carry out video surveillance tasks in the client workstations. JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND INTERCEPT KEYS Joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboards) are associated to intercept keys. You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform an action by associating intercept keys to them. For example, a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout. JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS AND VIDEO OUTPUTS Joystick controllers are associated to video outputs in MAXPRO VMS CONFIGURING JOYSTICK CONTROLLER To enable the joystick controller on the MAXPRO VMS, you need to configure the joystick controller. To configure the joystick controller 1. Press ALT + Home in Joystick Controller. The STARTUP Menu of the configuration page appears. 2. On the STARTUP MENU screen, press Configure. The Numeric Entry screen appears. 3. In the Enter Your Password box, type the password, and then press Enter. The Configuration screen appears. 4. Press HardwareConfig.The HARDWARE CONFIG screen appears. 5. Press Port Settings. The PORT SETUP screen appears. 6. Press Ethernet. The ETHERNET SETUP screen appears. 7. Press IP Address, and then type the IP Address of the Joystick Controller. 8. Press Subnet Mask, and then type the Subnet Mask of the network. 9. Press Default Gateway, select the required Gateway. 10. Press Sys.Cntl. IP Address, and then type the IP address of the MAXPRO™ VMS Server. 11. Press Save. 12. Press Quit to return to the STARTUP Menu screen. 13. In the STARTUP Menu, press Run. CONNECTING THE KEYBOARD TO MAXPRO VMS To connect a keyboard to MAXPRO VMS MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 175 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Joystick Controllers 1. Go to C:\Program Files\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\bin, the default path where MAXPRO VMS is installed. 2. Double-click MAXPRO_Keyboard_Prototype.exe. The Simulator dialog box appears. 3. In the Keyboard Number box, type the input number for the keyboard. 4. In the IP Address box, type the IP address of the MAXPRO™ VMS Server. 5. Click Power-On. SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF Before you sign on and sign off from a joystick controller, you must configure the features. CONFIGURING THE SIGN ON AND SIGN OFF FEATURE To configure the sign on and sign off feature 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Joystick Controllers. The Joystick Controllers screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-29 Joystick Controller 3. Double-click the joystick controller for which you want to use the sign on and sign off feature. The joystick screen appears. 4. In the Default Operator drop-down list, select None. 5. Click Save. 6. Restart the trinity services. 7. Create an ultrakey button for menu whose inctercept key value is 41. For more information on creating a ultrakey button, refer to the ultrakey user manual. Note: By default, the intercept key 41 is defined in MAXPRO VMS and the replacement macro is “?”. To sign on to the joystick controller 176 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Joystick Controllers 1. Press the Menu button on the joystick controller. 2. Select the operator number, and then press Enter. You are prompted to enter the four digit pin. 3. Type the four digit pin, and then press Enter. Note: You can see the names directly on the display. To sign off from the joystick controller 1. Press the Menu button on the joystick controller. 2. Press the PTZ tilt down button, and then press Enter. A message asking for confirmation appears. 3. Press Enter. UPDATING A JOYSTICK CONTROLLER You can update a joystick controller to modify the keyboard settings. To update a joystick controller 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Joystick Controllers. The Joystick Controllers screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the joystick controller you want to update, and then click Update. The Enter Keyboard details screen appears. Figure 4-30 Updating a Joystick Controller 4. In the Enter Keyboard Details area, select the Enabled check box. The Keyboard ID is displayed automatically. 5. In the Name box, type the name for the keyboard. 6. In the Default Monitor drop-down list, select the default monitor to be associated with the joystick controller. 7. In the Default Operator drop-down list, select the default user to be associated with the joystick controller. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 177 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Joystick Controllers 8. In the LCD Mode drop-down list, select the LCD display mode. 9. In the Audible Status area, select the check boxes to configure audible keyboard prompts. The following table lists the audible status options. Option Description Key Click The keyboard beeps in response to every key press. Joystick Click The keyboard beeps in response to any joystickmovement. Warning Prompt The keyboard buzzes in response to warning messages. Alarm Prompt The keyboard beeps continuously in response to an alarm message, until the alarm is cleared. Deadmap Tone The keyboard beeps if it is not used for specific amount of time, as defined by keyboard operator section. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the options. 10. In the Post Event Macro box, type the Macro number to be executed after an event. 11. In the Post Event Flag area, select the check boxes to select the type of events that triggers the post event macro.The following table lists the post event flag options. Option Description Monitor Select The post event macro is executed every time a monitor is selected. Source Select The post event macro is executed every time a video input device is selected. Source Changed The post event macro is executed every time a different video input device is selected on the keyboard’s current monitor. PTZ Control The post event macro is executed every time the keyboard is used for control of a PAN/TILT/ZOOM camera. VCR Control The post event macro is executed every time the keyboard is used for control of a VCR. All Keys The post event macro is executed for every key press on the keyboard. Note: Selecting the Select All check box enables all the options. 12. In the Device Macro Flags area, select the check boxes to set and test from within the macro environment. 13. Click Save. 178 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers SWITCHERS ................................................................. Switcher routes multiple analog camera inputs to multiple analog monitor outputs. SWITCHERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to switchers. You can restrict a non-associated user of the partition from viewing or changing the settings of the switcher. SWITCHERS AND EVENTS Events are predefined actions. Switchers have predefined events by default. An alarm is triggered whenever an event is generated. For example, when a switcher is disconnected, an event ‘Connection lost’ is generated. ADDING A SWITCHER You can add a switcher to route video input (analog camera) to a video output (analog monitor). Before you begin • Add Site. See Adding a Site for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. • Add Event Groups. See Adding an Event Group for more information. • Add Serial Ports. See Adding a Serial Port for more information. By default, a site, partition and event groups are available. You can associate the switcher to them or create new. To add a switcher 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Switchers. The Switchers screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-31 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Switchers 179 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers 3. Click Add. The General Settings appear. Figure 4-32 4. In the Switcher Name box, type the name of the switcher. 5. In the Description box, type a description for the switcher. 6. In the Switcher Type drop-down list, select the type of switcher. The following are the available type of switchers. Note: 7. • Vicon • Burle • AmericanDynamics • PelcoSwitcher • VideoBlox • MaxPro Selecting “MaxPro” enables the Primary Subrack ID box. In the Primary Subrack ID box, type the address of the subrack. Note: 180 Switcher General Settings Valid primary subrack addresses range from 1 – 99. A value of '0' indicates that no video switching occurs when the device is selected. For VideoBlox subrack, this ID represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox analog video input cards are connected. The valid primary subrack address is ‘V’+maximum communication ports. Suffix ‘A’ with primary subrack ID (for example, V1A) indicates that the audio is enabled for that particular video input. 8. From the Site drop-down list, select the location to which you want to connect the switcher. 9. From the Choose the COM Port drop-down list, select the required port. See also, Configuring Switchers. See Configuring Switchers for more information. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers 10. Associate Partition. See Associating Partitions to Switcher for more information. 11. Associate Events. See Associating Events to Switcher for more information. 12. Click Save. CONFIGURING SWITCHERS This section details the sequential procedure to configure the switchers that are supported by MAXPRO VMS. Before you begin • Add a Serial Port. • Configuring the Switcher 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Server in the navigation area, and then click Serial Ports. The Serial Ports screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. A Joystick screen appears. Refer to the instructions in the table to configure the port for various switchers. Switchers Instructions Vicon • • • • • • • Burle • • • • • • • Pelco • • • • • • • MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 9600. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select EIGHT. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select NONE. In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 9600. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select EIGHT. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select NONE. In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 9600. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select EIGHT. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select an odd parity 181 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers Switchers Instructions MaxPro • • • • • • • American Dynamics • • • • • • • VideoBlox • • • • • • • 4. In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 19200. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select SEVEN. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select an even parity In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 19200. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select SEVEN. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select an even parity In the COM Port Number, type the reference number of the serial port. In the Port Name type a name for the port. In the Port Type drop-down list, select the port type as NONE. In the Baud Rate drop-down list, select 19200. In the Data Bit drop-down list, select EIGHT. In the Stop Bit drop-down list, select ONE. In the Parity drop-down list, select NONE. Click Save. Note: For more information on adding serial ports, see Adding a Serial Port section. ADDING A SWITCHER To add a switcher 182 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Switchers. The Switchers screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. A Switcher screen appears. 4. In the Switcher Type drop-down list, select the required switcher. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers Note: For more details on adding a switcher, see Adding a Switcher section. ADDING A CAMERA AND ASSOCIATING A SWITCHER To add a camera and associate a switcher 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Cameras. The Cameras screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Save. 4. Click Add. A Camera screen appears. 5. In the Connected to area, click Switcher. The Switcher drop-down list is enabled and displays the configured switcher. 6. Select the required switcher. The Device Settings for the switcher appear. 7. For detailed procedures about associating the switcher to the camera, see Associating a Switcher to a Video Input. Note: You should have a camera physically connected to the input channel in the Vicon Switcher. In this case the camera must be physically connected to the channel 1. ADDING A ANALOG MONITOR To add an analog monitor 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Monitors. The Monitors screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. A Monitor screen appears. 4. In the Select Monitor Type, select Analog Monitor. 5. In the Monitor Name box, type a name for the monitor. Note: The camera number and the monitor number must be same. For example if you want the video output of camera number 1, then the monitor number must be 1. 6. Under the Device Settings, in the Select Switcher drop-down list, select the required switcher. 7. For detailed procedures about associating the switcher to the camera, see Adding Monitors. 8. Click Save. ASSOCIATING A JOYSTICK CONTROLLER To associate a joystick controller MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 183 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Joystick Controllers. The Joystick Controllers screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the Joystick Controller, and then click Update. A Joystick Controller screen appears. 4. In the Default Monitor drop-down list, select the default monitor to be associated with the joystick controller. For example, if the monitor number is one to which you have associated the required switcher, then select Monitor 1 as the default monitor. 5. In the Default Operator drop-down list, select the default user to be associated with the joystick controller. Note: 6. An operator must be added before you add a joystick controller. Click Save. After these settings are made in MAXPRO VMS, restart the Trinity Services. Note: Check whether you are able to drag and drop configured cameras on to the monitor. UPDATING A SWITCHER You can update a switcher to change or edit the settings like the recorder name, site and COM port. To update a switcher 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Switchers. The Switchers screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the switcher you want to update. 4. Click Update. The general settings for the switcher appears. You can modify the settings according to your needs. DELETING A SWITCHER To delete a switcher 184 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Switchers. The Switchers screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the switcher you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SWITCHER You can associate partitions to switcher. Associating a partition to a switcher restricts a nonassociated user of the partition from viewing the switcher or changing the settings of the switcher. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information.. To associate partitions to a switcher 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. Figure 4-33 Switcher Partitions 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate partitions from switcher • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING EVENTS TO SWITCHER You can associate events to switcher. An alarm is triggered whenever an event occurs. To associate events to a switcher 1. Click the Events tab. The screen displays the associated events, if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 185 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers Figure 4-34 Switcher Events 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Events dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate events from a switcher • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. To add event groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the Event Group. 2. Double-click on the Event Group box. Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add. 4. Click OK. Note: You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To disable an event 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable. 2. Click the cell under the Disabled column. A drop-down list is enabled. 3. Select True to disable the event. To assign severity level 186 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level. 2. Click the cell under the Severity Level column and edit the severity level. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Switchers Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. To enter remarks 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks. 2. Click the cell under the Remarks column and type the remarks. 3. Type the remarks you want to enter. To assign macros 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros. 2. Click the cell under the Start Procedure column, and then type the required macro. 3. Click the cell under the End Procedure column, and then type the required macro. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 187 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays RELAYS ................................................................. Relay is an output contact that can be triggered from MAXPRO VMS. Relays can be connected to devices like switcher, recorder, cameras, keyboard, and high level device.Relays send signals that perform various actions. For example, you can set a relay to open the door automatically when a motion is detected in a particular region. ADDING THE RELAY Before you begin • Add Site. See Adding a Site for more information. • Add Switcher. See Adding a Switcher for more information. • Add Recorder. Adding a Recorder for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. • Update Joystick Controller. See Updating a Joystick Controller for more information. By default, a site and a partition are available. You can associate the relay to them or create new. To add a relay 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Relays. The Relays screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-35 Relays 3. 188 Click Add. The Relay screen appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays Figure 4-36 Relays General 4. In the Callup Number box, type the unique ID to identify the relay. By default MAXPRO VMS assigns the next available ID. 5. In the Relay Description box, type a description for the relay. 6. In the Site drop-down list, select the site. 7. In the Connected To section, click one of the devices from which you want to add a relay. The following table lists the available devices to which a relay can be connected. Device Description Switcher For details on connecting to a switcher, see Connecting Relay to the Switcher. Analog Camera For details on connecting to a analog camera, see Connecting Relay to the Analog Camera. Keyboard For details on connecting to a keyboard, see Connecting the relay to Keyboard. Recorder For details on connecting to a recorder, see Connecting the relay to the Recorder. Network For details on connecting to a network, see Connecting Relay to the Network. High Level Device For details on connecting to a high level device, see Connecting Relay to the High Level Device. 8. Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current relay on the network. 9. Select the Output Default State On check box if you want the relay to be set to On, when the MAXPRO VMS is started. 10. Associate Partitions. 11. Click Save. The Trigger Relay options appear. 12. Click On to trigger relay. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 189 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays 13. Click Off to stop relay. CONNECTING RELAY TO THE SWITCHER Before you begin • Add Switchers. See Adding a Switcher for more information. To connect relay to a switcher 1. From the Switcher drop-down list, select the required switcher. The Switcher Settings appear. Note: 2. In the SubrackID box, the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically. The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range: ‘V’+maximum communication ports. In the Subrack Slot, type a slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides. Note: The valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks, and 1 for HD Series subracks. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator. Valid range is 1 to 255. 3. In the Output Bit section, select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay. Each relay can control one or more output bits. Click Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay. 4. Click Save. CONNECTING RELAY TO THE ANALOG CAMERA Before you begin • Add Cameras. See Adding a Camera for more information. To connect relay to an analog camera 1. 190 From the Analog Camera drop-down list, select the required camera. The Device Settings appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays Note: 2. In the Output Bit section, select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay. Each relay can control one or more output bits. Click Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay. Note: 3. In the SubrackID box, the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically.The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range: ‘V’+maximum communication ports. In the Subrack Slot, the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically. The valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks, and 1 for HD Series subracks. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator. Valid range is 1 to 255. Click Save. CONNECTING RELAY TO THE HIGH LEVEL DEVICE To connect relay to a high level device 1. In the High Level Device box, type the device number. The Device Settings appear. 2. In the SubrackID box, type the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides. Note: 3. The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range is ‘V’+maximum communication ports. In the Subrack Slot, the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically. Note: The valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks, and 1 for HD Series subracks. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator. Valid range is 1 to 255. 4. In the Output Bit section, select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay. Each relay can control one or more output bits. Click Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay. 5. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 191 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays CONNECTING RELAY TO THE NETWORK To connect relay to a network 1. In the Network box, type the network node and the video input device number from which you want the video input. 2. Click Save. CONNECTING THE RELAY TO THE RECORDER Before you begin • Add Recorders. See Adding a Recorder for more information. To connect relay to a analog camera 1. From the Recorder drop-down list, select the required recorder. The Output Settings appear. 2. In the Relay ID box, type the relay ID number for the recorder. 3. In the Site ID box, type the site ID of the recorder. 4. In the Station ID box, type the station ID of the recorder. 5. In the Digital IO Type, type the digital IO type of the recorder. 6. In the Output Bit section, select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay. Each relay can control one or more output bits. Click Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay. 7. Click Save. Note: Steps 3 through 9 are required only when you are connecting to Enterprise recorder. CONNECTING THE RELAY TO KEYBOARD To connect relay to a keyboard 1. From the Keyboard drop-down list, select the required joystick controller. The Device Settings appear. Note: 2. 192 In the SubrackID box, the Subrack ID number where the relay module resides is displayed automatically. The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range is ‘V’+maximum communication ports. In the Output Bit section, select the required output that needs to be controlled by the relay. Each relay can control one or more output bits. Click Select All if you want all the output bits to be controlled by a single relay. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays Note: 3. In the Subrack Slot, the slot number within the control subrack where the control output module resides is displayed automatically. The valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks, and 1 for HD Series subracks. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the physical control input slot number from AVBPIT alarm concentrator. Valid range is 1 to 255. Click Save. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE RELAY You can associate partition to relay. Associating a partition to a relay restricts a non associated user of the relay from changing the settings of the relay. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to relay 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. Figure 4-37 Relays Partitions 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions. To disassociate partitions to relay • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. DELETING THE RELAY You can delete a relay when you no longer want to trigger a task that is based on a relay. Before you begin • Disassociate Partitions. Associating Partitions to the Relay for more information. To delete a relay 1. Click the Configurator tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 193 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Relays 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click relays. The Relays screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the relay that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. UPDATING THE RELAY You can update a relay device to change its association with a partition and also to modify its settings. To update a relay 194 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click relays. The Relays screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the relay you want to update. 4. Click Update. The settings for the relay appear. You can modify the settings. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs ALARM INPUTS ................................................................. Alarm inputs are used to raise alarms through an external device in MAXPRO VMS. These alarm inputs can be associated to devices like switcher, recorder, camera, keyboard, network and high level device. ADDING AN ALARM INPUT You can add an alarm input and associate it to the devices. These alarm inputs trigger alarm whenever an event occurs. Before you begin • Add Site. See Adding a Site for more information. • Add Switcher. See Adding a Switcher for more information. • Add Recorder. Adding a Recorder for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. • Update Joystick Controller. See Updating a Joystick Controller for more information. By default, a site and a partition are available. You can associate the alarm input to them or create new. To add an alarm input 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Devices branch in the navigation area, and then click Alarm Inputs. The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-38 3. Alarm Input Click Add. The Alarm Input screen appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 195 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs Figure 4-39 Adding an Alarm Input 4. The Enabled check box is selected by default. Clear this check box to disable the alarm input. 5. In the Alarm Input Name box, type the alarm input name. 6. From the Site drop-down list, select the required site. 7. In the Alarm Input Number box, type the alarm input number 8. In the Normal State drop-down list, select Open or Closed as the normal state for the alarm input. 9. From the Operating Mode drop-down list, select the required mode. The available modes are listed in the following table. Modes Description Direct The alarm condition activates or de-activates when it physically changes state, or is set or cleared with macros. Latched Once the alarm is triggered, it remains active until it is reset manually using the alarm clear option. Toggle The first time the alarm is triggered it becomes active, the next time it is cleared. 10. In the Connected To section, click one of the devices for which you want to add the alarm input. The following table lists the available devices to which an Alarm Input can be connected. 196 Device Description Switcher For details on connecting a switcher, see Connecting Alarm Input to the Switcher. Recorder For details on connecting a recorder, see Connecting Alarm Input to the Recorder. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs Device Description Remote Camera For details on connecting a remote camera, see Connecting Alarm Input to the Remote Camera. Keyboard For details on connecting a keyboard, see Connecting Alarm Input to the Keyboard. Network For details on connecting a network, see Connecting Alarm input to the Network. High Level Device For details on connecting a high level device, see Connecting Alarm Input to the High Level Device. 11. Select the LINK check box if you want to broadcast the status changes and actions performed on the current alarm input on the network. 12. Associate Partition. 13. Click Save. Note: You can switch on or switch off an alarm input using the On and Off buttons under Trigger Alarm Input. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE NETWORK To connect alarm input to a network 1. In the Network box, type the network node and the video input device number for which you want to associate the alarm input. 2. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 197 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 3. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 4. Click Save. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE RECORDER To connect alarm input to a recorder 1. From the Recorder drop-down list, select the required recorder. The recorder settings appear. 2. In the Alarm Input ID text box under Input Settings tab, type the Alarm Input ID. 3. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 4. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 5. Click Save. 6. For connecting alarm input to a Enterprise, see Connecting to Enterprise. C ONNECTING 1. 198 TO E NTERPRISE On the Input Settings tab, specify the following details. Site ID Type the site ID of the recorder. Station ID Type the station ID of the recorder. Bit Filter Type Type the bit filter type Bit Filter ID Type the bit filter ID. Source Information The source information is automatically updated when the Discover Cameras feature is used. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 2. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type the required macro to start the event. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type the required macro to end the event. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm end macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE REMOTE CAMERA To connect alarm input to a remote camera 1. From the Remote Camera drop-down list, select the required camera. The remote camera settings appear. 2. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 3. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 4. Click Save. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE SWITCHER To connect alarm input to a switcher MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 199 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 1. From the Switcher drop-down list, select the required switcher. The switcher settings appear. 2. On the Advanced Settings tab, specify the following details. 3. Settings Description Subrack ID Specifies the subrack ID number where the alarm input module resides. The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel alarm is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard alarm is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox Subrack, this ID represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range is ‘V’+maximum communication ports. Subrack Slot This field defines the slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input module resides. Valid slot numbers are 1 – 32 for I/O and combination video/I/O subracks, and 15 – 17 for HD Series subracks. For VideoBlox Subrack, this number represents the alarm concentrator AVBPIT number. Valid range is 0 to 255. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 4. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 5. Click Save. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE HIGH LEVEL DEVICE To connect alarm input to a high level device 1. 200 In the High Level Device box, type the device number. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 2. On the Advanced Settings tab, specify the following details Settings Description Subrack ID The Subrack ID number where the alarm input resides is displayed automatically. Note: The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range: ‘V’+maximum communication ports. Subrack Slot 3. Type a slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input resides. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 4. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 5. Click Save. CONNECTING ALARM INPUT TO THE KEYBOARD To connect alarm input to a keyboard 1. From the keyboard drop-down list, select the required joystick controller. The keyboard settings appear. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 201 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs 2. On the Advanced Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Subrack ID The Subrack ID number where the alarm input resides is displayed automatically. Note: The valid range is 1 – 99. If a high level or mimic panel output is used, the number is prefixed with an “H”. If a keyboard output is used, the number is prefixed with a “K”. For VideoBlox subrack, this represents the ‘V’+communication port number to which the VideoBlox alarm concentrator AVBPIT is connected. Valid range: ‘V’+maximum communication ports. Subrack Slot 3. Type a slot number within the control subrack where the alarm input resides. On the Event Settings tab, specify the following details. Settings Description Event Description Type a description for the event. Start Macro Type an alarm start macro. When an alarm condition is detected for an alarm input, the alarm start macro is executed. Finish Macro Type an alarm finish macro. When a detected alarm input returns to its normal state, the alarm finish macro is executed. Global ID Type a unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event settings. Severity Type a severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 4. On the Event Groups tab, select the check box corresponding to the event group that you want to associate to the alarm input, and then click Associate. 5. Click Save. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE ALARM INPUT You can associate partition to alarm inputs. Associating a partition to an Alarm Input restricts a non - associated user from viewing or modifying the Alarm Input. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to alarm input 202 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. The selected partition is displayed in the list of associated partitions. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Inputs To disassociate partitions from alarm input • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. DELETING THE ALARM INPUT You can delete an alarm input when you do not want external device to raise an alarm. All the associations made to the alarm inputs are removed, when you delete it. Before you begin • Disassociate Partitions. Associating Partitions to the Alarm Input for more information. To delete alarm input 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Alarm Inputs. The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the alarm inputs that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. UPDATING THE ALARM INPUT You can update alarm input to change its association with a partition and also to modify its settings. To update alarm input 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Devices in the navigation area, and then click Alarm Inputs. The Alarm Input screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the alarm input you want to update. 4. Click Update. The settings for the alarm input appear. You can modify the settings. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 203 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Contact Group CONTACT GROUP ................................................................. Contact group is a group of users in MAXPRO VMS. You can create contact groups of users with different roles. For example, you can create a contact group of users who are associated to operator role. Alarm notifications can be sent to a contact group. ADDING A CONTACT GROUP You can add a user group to group the users on the basis of the roles. Only the “admin” user can add a contact group in MAXPRO VMS. Before you begin • Add Roles. See Adding a role for more information. • Add Users. See Adding a User for more information. • Add Workstations. Adding a Workstation for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To add a contact group 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Contact Group. The Contact Group screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-40 204 Contact Group MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Contact Group 3. Click Add. The settings for the contact group appears. Figure 4-41 Adding a Contact Group 4. In the Group Name box, type the name for the group. 5. In the Description box, type a description for the contact group. 6. In the Associate Users section, select the required role. The users associated to the role are displayed in the Available Users section. 7. In the Available Users section, select the check box corresponding to the user whom you 8. want to select, and then click or click select to deselect to deselect all. or to select all the users. Similarly, Click Save. DELETING THE CONTACT GROUP You can delete a contact group when you no longer want to keep the contact group. To delete a contact group 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Contact Group. The Contact Group screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the contact group that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. UPDATING THE CONTACT GROUP You can update a contact group to change the users and roles for a contact group. To update a contact group 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Contact Group. The Contact Group screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the contact group you want to update. 4. Click Update. The settings for the contact group appear. You can modify the settings. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 205 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Contacts CONTACTS ................................................................. ADDING A CONTACT You can add and store a contact in MAXPRO VMS. Only an user with administrator privileges can add contacts. To add a contact 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Contact. The Contact screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-42 3. Click Add. The general settings for the contact appears. Figure 4-43 4. 206 Contact Adding a Contact In the User Name box, type a name for the user. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Contacts 5. In the Email ID box, type the email ID for the user, if required. 6. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 207 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users USERS ................................................................. A user in MAXPRO VMS is responsible for performing various operations like viewing video, reporting alarms, and other video surveillance tasks. You can create two types of users in MAXPRO VMS —System Local User and Windows User. Any new user when added is automatically associated to all the event groups and joystick controller. You can remove the association of a user to event groups and joystick controller to limit the access. SYSTEM LOCAL USER A system local user can access only MAXPRO VMS. This user may not have the access to client workstation. WINDOWS USER A windows user can access client workstation and also MAXPRO VMS. USERS AND ROLES Roles are provided to a user. These roles comprise in them a set of privileges. When a user is associated to a role, the privileges that are available for the role are also assigned to the user. THE “ADMIN” USER The first time MAXPRO VMS is deployed at a site, a default user named “admin” is created. The “admin” user is assigned the role “administrator”. Only this user can add new users, assign roles to the added users, add or modify the privileges to the users, and also assign the users to partitions. USERS AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to users. Users are directly associated to the partition which is associated to the role. Users can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions. A user can also be associated to other partitions which are not associated to the assigned role. USERS AND JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS Joystick controllers are keyboards that are attached to video outputs in MAXPRO VMS. Users are associated to joystick controllers. These users can use the associated joystick controllers to carry the video surveillance tasks in MAXPRO VMS. USERS AND EVENT GROUPS An event group is a set of events that occur on video devices. Users are associated to Event Groups. When any event in the event group occurs, only the users who are associated to the event group can acknowledge the event. USERS AND WORKSTATIONS A workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed. Workstations are associated to Users. Users associated to a workstation can log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions. Users are directly associated to the workstation which is associated to the role. A user can be associated to other workstations also which are not associated to a role. ADDING A USER You can add a user by providing a unique user name and a password. 208 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Only “admin” can add a new user in MAXPRO VMS. After you add a new user, you can assign a role to it. After the role is assigned to the user, the privileges that are defined as a part of the role are also added to the user. You can add or remove any privileges for the specific user-role combination using the “Customized Privileges” option. Before you begin • Add Role. See Adding a role for more information. By default, a partition and a workstation are available. You can associate a user to them or create new. To add a user 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Users. The Users screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-44 3. Users Click Add. The General Settings tab appears. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 209 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Figure 4-45 Adding User 4. In the User ID box, type a name for the user. 5. In the User Name box, type the name of the user. 6. In the Description box, type the required description. 7. In the Role box, select the role you want to assign to the user. 8. Select the Customized Privileges check box to enable or disable privileges for a user. The following table lists the privileges you can enable for a user. Privileges Description Viewer 210 Viewer Access To restrict access to viewer tab. Site View To view sites. Alarm To view alarms. ImageClipTreeVie w To view image clip tree. Message Box To view message box. MyDevices To view MyDevices. Shared Devices Permission To view and restrict shared devices. KeyboardUtility To access virtual keyboard. Store Pre-shots To store pre-shots Reloading Device Connections To reload the device connections. View/Update License To view or update license. Iris Access To access iris of the camera. Focus Access To access focus access of the camera. Monitors To view monitors. Sequences To view sequences. Salvo Views To view salvo. Add My Salvo View To add my salvo view. Modify My Salvo View To modify my salvo view. Delete My Salvo View To delete my salvo view. Add Shared Salvo View To add shared salvo view. Modify Shared Salvo View To modify shared salvo view. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Delete Shared Salvo View Delete Shared Salvo View. Add or update Surrounding Camera To add or update surrounding camera. Enable/Disable Camera To enable or disable the cameras. Configure Privacy To configure the privacy settings. Show Calender Search To display the calender search. Time Line TimeLine Access To allow the user to access TimeLine window. Clip Delete To delete video clips. Image Delete To delete images. Create Bookmark To create bookmark. View Bookmark To view bookmark. Delete Bookmark To delete bookmark. Create Loop To allow user to create loop. Update loop To allow user to update loop. Clip Creation To allow user to create clips. Configurator Configurator Access To allow user to access configurator. Add Switcher To allow user to add switcher. Update Switcher To allow user to update switcher. Delete Switcher To allow user to delete switcher. Add System Macro To allow user to add system macro. Update System Macro To allow user to update system macro. Delete System Macro To allow user to delete system macro. Add Logical Camera To allow user to add logical camera. Update Logical Camera To allow user to update logical camera Delete Logical Camera To allow user to delete logical camera Add Relay To add relay. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 211 4 212 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Update Relay To update relay. Delete Relay To delete relay. Add Alarm Input To add an alarm input. Update Alarm Input To update an alarm input. Delete Alarm Input To delete an alarm input. Update Controller To update controller. Import To Import files into MAXPRO VMS. Export To export the MAXPRO VMS files. Configure Equip Camera To configure equip camera. Cold/Warm Boot To allow user to boot. Add Job To add a job. Update Job To update a job. Delete Job To delete a job. Add Contact To add a contact. Update Contact To update a contact. Delete Contact To delete a contact. Add Contact Group To add a contact group. Update Contact Group To update a contact group. Delete Contact Group To delete a contact group. Add User To add new users. Delete User To allow user to delete new users. Modify User Privilege To modify user privilege. Add Recorder To allow user to add recorder. Update Recorder To allow user to update recorder. Delete Recorder To allow user to delete recorder. Add Video Input To allow user to add Video Input. Update Video Input To allow user to update video input. Delete Video Input To allow user to delete video input. Add Video Output To allow user to add video output. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Update Video Output To allow user to update video output. Delete Video Output To allow user to delete video output. Add Sequence To allow user to add sequence. Update Sequence To allow user to update sequence. Delete Sequence To allow user to delete sequence. Add Port To allow user to add a port. Update Port To allow user to update a port. Delete Port To allow user to delete a port. Add Partition To allow user to add a partition. Update Partition To allow user to update a partition. Delete Partition To allow user to delete a partition. Add Site To allow user to add a site. Update Site To allow user to update a site. Delete Site To allow user to delete a site. Add Workstation To allow user to add a workstation. Update Workstation To allow user to update a workstation. Delete Workstation To allow user to delete a workstation. Add Event Group To allow user to add event group. Update Event Group To allow user to update event group. Delete Event Group To allow user to delete event group. Add Intercept To allow user to add intercept keys. Update Intercept To allow user to update joystick controller. Delete Intercept To allow user to delete intercept Update Joystick Controller To allow user to update joystick controller Add Role To allow user to add role. Update Role To allow user to update role. Delete Role To allow user to delete role. Search Search Access To allow user to access search features. Clip Archive To allow user to perform clip archive. Clip Restore To allow user to perform clip restore. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 213 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Clip Delete To allow user to perform to delete clip. Reports Report Access To allow user to access report features. Controller Operator Privileges Display Name To display the users name. Multiple SignOn To allow user to be signed on to more than one keyboard at a time. Swap PTZ Up Down To reverse the up/down control of a pan/tilt camera when it is being used by user. Scan Set To allow user to edit scan sequences. Camera View Set To allow user to set PTZ camera views. UserMacro Set To allow user to create user keyboard macros Camera Analog PTZ To allow user to set PTZ options for analog camera. Standard Device To allow user to control standard device functions. Video Recorder To allow user to control VCR functions. Smart Device To allow user to control smart device functions. Controller Menu Access Video Disable To disable live video view for a user. ScanSequence Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock scan sequences. VideoControl Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock video control. Set Clock To allow user to set the system time and date. SignOff To allow user to sign off from a key board. Change Pin To allow user to change the PIN of all system users. Status Information To allow user to change the current system status. Alarm Enable Disable To allow system user to enable or disable system alarms. System Configuration To allow user to run the Windows SetMax configuration editor, save the current system environment as the default settings, or exit to Windows. UserMacro Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock user macros. ToolBar Buttons SalvoLayouts... 214 To allow user to add or access different salvolayouts. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Privileges Description Surrounding Camera To allow user to view surrounding cameras. Full Screen Mode To allow user to view full screen mode. Sync PlayBack Mode To allow user to access the sync playback mode. Remote Monitor Mode To allow user to access the remote monitor mode. Incident management Mode To allow user to access the incident management mode. Create Salvo To allow user to create a salvo. Application Launch Pad To allow user to access the application launch pad. Salvo Snapshot To allow user to capture a salvo snapshot. Instant Clip Export to enable user to instantly export a clip. Snapshot To capture a snapshot. Color Correction Allow user to perform color correction Flip Allow user to flip a video Mirror Allow user to mirror view a video Preview Allow user to preview a video Remove Text Overlay Allow user to remove text overlay Analytics Add Analytics server To add analytics server Update Analytics server To update analytics server Delete Analytics server To delete analytics server Launch HVA Configurator To launch HVA configurator Launch HVA Live Monitor To launch HVA Live Monitor Reports and Foresenics To access the reports and forsenics Enable Analytics Option for Camera To allow user to enable the analytics option for camera MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 215 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Note: 9. To enable all the privileges select the Allow All check box and to deny all the privileges, select the Deny All check box. From the User Type drop-down list, select System Local User or Windows User. 10. In the Password box, type the user password. 11. In the Confirm Password box, retype the user password. 12. In the Pin Number box, type the Pin number. The Pin number is required only for Ultrakey keyboard and not required for MAXPRO VMS client login. 13. In the Domain Name box, type the name of the domain. Currently this box is disabled. 14. In the Keyboard Timeout (Sec) box, type the time out value. 15. In the Auto SignOff Period (Sec) box, type the time out value. 16. In the Sign On Macro box, type the sign on macro. 17. In the Sign Off Macro box, type the sign off macro. 18. Associate Partitions. See Associating Partitions to the User for more information. 19. Associate Joystick Controllers. See Associating joystick controller to users for more information. 20. Associate Event Groups. See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information. 21. Associate Workstations. Associating Workstations to the Users for more information. 22. Click Save. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE USER You can associate partitions to a user. Associating partitions to a user enables the user to perform video surveillance tasks for all the video devices that are grouped in the partition. You can associate more than one partition to a user. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to a user 216 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. Figure 4-46 User Partitions 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate partitions from a user • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING WORKSTATIONS TO THE USERS You can associate workstations to users to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions. Before you begin • Add a Workstation. Adding a Workstation for more information. To associate a user to workstation 1. Click the User Workstations tab. The screen displays the associated workstations if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 217 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Figure 4-47 User Workstations 2. Click Associate. The Select User Workstation dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate workstation from a user • Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING JOYSTICK CONTROLLER TO USERS You can associate users to joystick controllers to perform video surveillance tasks in MAXPRO VMS. Before you begin • Add a joystick controller. To associate the joystick controller to a user 1. 218 Click the Joystick Controller tab. The screen displays the associated joysticks if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Figure 4-48 User Joystick Controller 2. Click Associate. The Select Joystick Controller dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. By default, all the joystick controllers are associated when a user is added. You can remove the joystick controllers that you do not require. To disassociate Joystick Controller from user • Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING EVENT GROUPS TO USERS You can associate a user to a event group to acknowledge the event that occurs in it. Before you begin • Add Event Group. To associate a event group to a user 1. Click the Event Groups tab. The screen displays the associated event groups if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 219 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users Figure 4-49 User Event Groups 2. Click Associate. The Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event group from a user • Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group name, and then click Remove. DISCOVERING AND IMPORTING USERS You can discover users connected to a domain or workstation and add them to the MAXPRO VMS. To discover and import users 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Users. The Users screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Discover. The User Discovery Details screen appears. 4. In the Domain/Workgroup drop-down list, select the domain or workgroup. 5. In the Name Filter box, type the name which you want to discover. Note: 220 If you want to search more than one name belonging to the same category, type the full name or partial name succeeded by a “*”, and then click Query. For example, to search users who have their first name as John, type John* or Joh*, and then click Query. 6. Click Query. The results are displayed in the Results section. The users who are not added to MAXPRO VMS are listed in green color. 7. Select the check box corresponding to the required user. 8. In the User Role drop-down list, select a role for the user. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Users 9. Click Import. The user is added and his name is listed in red color. Note: You can skip step 5 if you do not want to use name filter option. 10. Click Reset to restore default settings or to discover new users. UPDATING A USER You can modify the settings of user to change the user ID, password and enable privileges. You can update user settings only if you have admin rights. To update a user 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Users. The Users screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the user. 4. Click Update. The general settings for the user appear. You can modify the settings. DELETING A USER You can remove a user from MAXPRO VMS. When you delete a user, all the associations made to the user are also removed. To delete a user 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Users. The Users screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the user you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 221 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles ROLES ................................................................. The users in MAXPRO VMS perform various video surveillance operations. The surveillance operations can be monitoring the live video, recording scenes of interest and so on. Some of these operations can be critical while some can be routine ones that are performed every day. A user can be responsible for carrying out the routine tasks or critical tasks. This responsibility for performing various tasks is provided to the users by means of roles. With every role, there are a set of predefined privileges that are also assigned to the user. While a role can be just a label that is assigned to a user, like Operator or Administrator, it is the privileges that provide the right and responsibility for carrying out the operations. Administrator and operator are the predefined roles in MAXPRO VMS and consists of a set of privileges. The role Administrator cannot be deleted or updated. Apart from the predefined roles, you can add a new role with a set of privileges. When you associate users to the role, the privileges that are defined as a part of the role is also added to the user. Any new partition and workstation added are automatically associated to the administrator role. If required, you can also add or remove privileges for a user-role combination. The modified set of privileges is applied only to the specific user-role combination and does not change the privilege set for the role. ROLES AND PARTITIONS A partition is a logical grouping of video devices. Partitions are associated to Roles. Roles are assigned to users, which enable them to view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions. ROLES AND WORKSTATIONS A workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed. Workstations are associated to Roles. Roles are assigned to users which enables them to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions. ADDING A ROLE You can add a new role by providing a role name. After adding a role, you can associate users to it. The role along with its set of privileges is added to the user. You can also add or remove privileges to the user-role combination. In addition, you can also deny all privileges to the user-role. Before you begin • Add Workstations. See Adding a Workstation for more information. • Add Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. By default, a partition and a workstation are available. You can associate a role to them or create new. To add a role 222 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand User Management in the navigation area, and then click Roles. The Roles screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Figure 4-50 3. Roles Click Add. The General Settings tab appears. Figure 4-51 Roles General Settings 4. In the Name box, type a name for the role. 5. In the Associated User area, the user associated with the role is displayed. Note: User is displayed only when the role is associated. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 223 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles 6. In the Privileges section, select the check box corresponding to the privileges for enabling them for the role. The following table lists the privileges you can enable for a user. Privileges Description Viewer 224 Viewer Access To restrict access to viewer tab. Site View To view sites. Alarm To view alarms. ImageClipTreeView To view image clip tree. Message Box To view message box. MyDevices To view MyDevices. Shared Devices Permission To view and restrict shared devices. KeyboardUtility To access virtual keyboard. Store Pre-shots To store pre-shots Reloading Device Connections To reload the device connections. View/Update License To view or update license. Iris Access To access iris of the camera. Focus Access To access focus access of the camera. Video Outputs To view Video Outputs. Monitors To view/access monitors. Sequences To view sequences. Salvo Views To view salvo. Add My Salvo View To add my salvo view. Modify My Salvo View To modify my salvo view. Delete My Salvo View To delete my salvo view. Add Shared Salvo View To add shared salvo view. Modify Shared Salvo View To modify shared salvo view. Delete Shared Salvo View Delete Shared Salvo View Add or update Surrounding Camera To add or update surrounding camera. Enable / Disable cameras To allow user to enable/disable cameras. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Configure Privacy To configure the privacy settings. Show Calender Search To display the calender search. Time Line TimeLine Access To allow user to access TimeLine window. Clip Delete To delete video clips. Image Delete To delete images. Create Bookmark To create bookmark. View Bookmark To view bookmark. Delete Bookmark To delete bookmark. Create Loop To allow user to create loop. Update loop To allow user to update loop. Clip Creation To allow user to create clips. Configurator Configurator Access To allow user to access configurator. Add Switcher To allow user to add switcher. Update Switcher To allow user to update switcher. Delete Switcher To allow user to delete switcher. Add System Macro To allow user to add system macro. Update System Macro To allow user to update system macro. Delete System Macro To allow user to delete system macro. Add Logical Camera To allow user to add logical camera. Update Logical Camera To allow user to update logical camera Delete Logical Camera To allow user to delete logical camera Add Relay To add relay. Update Relay To update relay. Delete Relay To delete relay. Add Alarm Input To add an alarm input. Update Alarm Input To update an alarm input. Delete Alarm Input To delete an alarm input. Update Controller To update controller. Import To Import files into MAXPRO VMS. Export To export the MAXPRO VMS files. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 225 4 226 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Configure Equip Camera To configure equip camera. Cold/Warm Boot To allow user to boot. Add Job To add a job. Update Job To update a job. Delete Job To delete a job. Add Contact To add a contact. Update Contact To update a contact. Delete Contact To delete a contact. Add Contact Group To add a contact group. Update Contact Group To update a contact group. Delete Contact Group To delete a contact group. Add User To add new users. Delete User To allow user to delete new users. Modify User Privilege To modify user privilege. Add Recorder To allow user to add recorder. Update Recorder To allow user to update recorder. Delete Recorder To allow user to delete recorder. Add Video Input To allow user to add Video Input. Update Video Input To allow user to update video input. Delete Video Input To allow user to delete video input. Add Video Output To allow user to add video output. Update Video Output To allow user to update video output. Delete Video Output To allow user to delete video output. Add Sequence To allow user to add sequence. Update Sequence To allow user to update sequence. Delete Sequence To allow user to delete sequence. Add Port To allow user to add a port. Update Port To allow user to update a port. Delete Port To allow user to delete a port. Add Partition To allow user to add a partition. Update Partition To allow user to update a partition. Delete Partition To allow user to delete a partition. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Add Site To allow user to add a site. Update Site To allow user to update a site. Delete Site To allow user to delete a site. Add Workstation To allow user to add a workstation. Update Workstation To allow user to update a workstation. Delete Workstation To allow user to delete a workstation. Add Event Group To allow user to add event group. Update Event Group To allow user to update event group. Delete Event Group To allow user to delete event group. Add Intercept To allow user to add intercept keys. Update Intercept To allow user to update joystick controller. Delete Intercept To allow user to delete intercept. Add Role To allow user to add role. Update Role To allow user to update role. Delete Role To allow user to delete role. Search Search Access To allow user to access search features. Clip Archive To allow user to perform clip archive. Clip Restore To allow user to perform clip restore. Clip Delete To allow user to perform to delete clip. Reports Report Access To allow user to access report features. Controller Operator Privileges Display Name To display the users name. Multiple SignOn To allow user to be signed on to more than one keyboard at a time. Swap PTZ UpDown To reverse the up/down control of a pan/tilt camera when it is being used by user. Scan Set To allow user to edit scan sequences. Camera View Set To allow user to set PTZ camera views. UserMacro Set To allow user to create user keyboard macros Camera Analog PTZ To allow user to set PTZ options for analog camera. Standard Device To allow user to control standard device functions. Video Recorder To allow user to control VCR functions. Smart Device To allow user to control smart device functions. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 227 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Controller Menu Access Video Disable To disable live video view for a user. ScanSequence Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock scan sequences. VideoControl Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock video control. VideoSource Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock videosource. Set Clock To allow user to set the system time and date. SignOff To allow user to sign off from a key board. Change Pin To allow user to change the PIN of all system users. Status Information To allow user to change the current system status. Alarm Enable Disable To allow system user to enable or disable system alarms. System Configuration To allow user to run the Windows SetMax configuration editor, save the current system environment as the default settings, or exit to Windows. UserMacro Lock Unlock To allow user to lock or unlock user macros. ToolBar Buttons 228 SalvoLayouts... To allow user to add or access different salvolayouts. Surrounding Camera To allow user to view surrounding cameras. Full Screen Mode To allow user to view full screen mode. Sync PlayBack Mode To allow user to access the sync playback mode. Remote Monitor Mode To allow user to access the remote monitor mode. Incident management Mode To allow user to access the incident management mode. Create Salvo To allow user to create a salvo. Application Launch Pad To allow user to access the application launch pad. Salvo Snapshot To allow user to capture a salvo snapshot. Instant Clip Export to enable user to instantly export a clip. Snapshot To capture a snapshot. Color Correction Allow user to perform color correction. Flip Allow user to flip a video. Mirror Allow user to mirror view a video. Preview Allow user to preview a video. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Privileges Description Remove Text Overlay Allow user to remove text overlay. Analytics Add Analytics server To add analytics server. Update Analytics server To update analytics server. Delete Analytics server To delete analytics server. Launch HVA Configurator To launch HVA configurator. Launch HVA Live Monitor To launch HVA Live Monitor. Reports and Forsenics To access the reports and forsenics. Enable Analytics Option for Camera To allow user to enable the analytics option for camera. Note: To enable all the privileges select the Allow All check box and to deny all the privileges, select the Deny All check box. 7. Associate Partitions. See Associating Partitions to the Roles for more information. 8. Associate Workstations. Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information. 9. Click Save. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO THE ROLES You can associate partitions to roles. Associating partitions to a role enables a user to perform video surveillance tasks for all the video devices that are grouped in the partition. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partition to the role 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area, and then click Roles. The Roles screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the role you want to associate. The General Settings screen appears. 4. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 229 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Figure 4-52 Roles Partitions 5. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 6. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 7. Click OK. To disassociate partitions from the role • Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING WORKSTATIONS TO THE ROLES You can associate client workstations to roles to enable a user associated to the role to log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface and perform various actions. Before you begin • Add a Workstation. Adding a Workstation for more information. To associate workstations to the role 230 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area, and then click Roles. The Roles screen appears in the display area. 3. Double-click the role you want to associate. The General Settings screen appears. 4. Click the Workstations tab. The screen displays the associated workstations, if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles Figure 4-53 Roles Workstations 5. Click Associate. The Select User Workstation dialog box appears. 6. Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name you want to associate. 7. Click OK. To disassociate workstations from the role • Select the check box corresponding to the workstation name, and then click Remove. UPDATING A ROLE You can update the details of a role by changing the role name. In addition, you can also add or remove privileges to the role. To update a role 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area, and then click Roles. The Roles screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the role you want to update. 4. Click Update. The general settings appear. You can modify the settings. DELETING A ROLE You can delete a role from MAXPRO VMS. Before you delete a role, ensure that you remove all the associations made to it. Before you begin • Disassociate Partitions. See Associating Partitions to the Roles for more information. • Disassociate Workstations. See Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information. To delete a role 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the User Management branch in the navigation area, and then click Roles. The Roles screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 231 4 232 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Roles 3. Select the check box corresponding to the role you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Sequences SEQUENCES ................................................................. A sequence is a set of live video streamed one after the other from cameras for a specified time interval. You can select the cameras or presets to be included in a sequence and also specify the time interval for which the video from each camera or preset must be displayed. Note: Presets must be defined for the cameras before including them in the sequence CREATING A SEQUENCE You can create a sequence to display video that is being captured from different cameras located across the sites. To create a sequence 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Sequences. The Sequences screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. The Scan screen appears. 4. From the Sequence Type drop-down list, select the required sequence type. The available sequence types are listed in the table. Sequence Type Description Scan During a Scan sequence operation, camera selection entries are wrapped around when the end of the scan sequence is reached. This mode of operation continues until the scan sequence is halted. Tour During a Tour sequence, the scan sequence is stepped through only once. Index When Index is selected for this field, it indicates that the table is used to hold information for complex macro programming. 5. In the Description box, type a name for the sequence. 6. Follow steps 7 through 11 if you select Scan or Tour as scan type. If you select index type: 7. • In the Sequence Type drop-down list, select Index. • Type the index value corresponding to the camera ID. • Click Save. In the Dwell Time box, type the dwell time, in seconds, for the camera to display video before advancing to next camera. 8. In the Select Cameras list, click 9. Select the check box corresponding to the cameras that must be included in the sequence. . The Select from List dialog box appears. 10. Click OK to close the Select from List dialog box. The cameras included in the sequence appear in the Select Cameras list. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 233 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Sequences 11. To include presets in the sequence, type the preset number in the Preset column next to a camera. The video from each camera in the list is displayed sequentially. Note: If the value is zero in the preset column, the presets are not included in the sequence. By default, presets are zero for a fixed camera. 12. Click Save. PLAYING A SEQUENCE To play a sequence 1. Click the Viewer tab. 2. Click the Sequences window. 3. Double-click the sequence you want to play or select the sequence, and then click Play Sequence. You can drag and drop the sequence on a panel in the salvo layout. You can also play a sequence using the joystick controller (Ultrakey keyboard). See About Joystick Controllers for more information. REARRANGING THE CAMERAS IN THE SEQUENCE You can rearrange the cameras and presets in the sequence. When you rearrange them, the sequence of live video streaming from each of the cameras is altered based on the rearrangement. To rearrange the cameras 1. Select the check box corresponding to the camera you want to rearrange inside the sequence. 2. Click down. 3. Click Save. to move the camera one row up, or click REMOVING CAMERAS FROM THE to move the camera one row SEQUENCE You can delete a camera from a sequence, when you do not want to view the live video from it as a part of the sequence. \ To remove cameras from a sequence 1. In the Select Cameras list, select the check box corresponding to the cameras you want to remove. 2. Click the 3. Click Save. to remove the cameras from the sequence. REMOVING PRESETS FROM THE SEQUENCE You can remove a preset when you do not want it to be associated with a sequence. To remove presets from a camera 1. 234 In the Preset column, delete the preset number next to the camera. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 2. Click Save. LOCKING A SEQUENCE You can lock an existing sequence to prevent the users from modifying it. To lock a sequence 1. Select the Locked check box. 2. Click Save. UPDATING A SEQUENCE Updating a sequence allows you to change the sequence of video display from cameras. To update a sequence 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Sequences. The Sequences screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the sequence you want to update. 4. Click Update. You can change the sequence of the cameras. DELETING A SEQUENCE To delete a sequence 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Sequences. The Sequences screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the sequence. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics ANALYTICS ................................................................. Analytics server enables smooth and effective daily surveillance operations. Analytics system is efficient in taking video inputs from live cameras, analyze the video content, and extract relevant information from the video. Automation of motion detection, triggering real-time alarms, and enabling fast search and retrieval of video are some of the distinct features of analytics. Video Analytics takes video inputs from multiple live cameras, analyzes the video content in real-time, and extracts relevant information in the video. The system includes analytics servers, which analyze the content of the video, and various client GUI applications that can connect to the analytics servers to perform specific management or monitoring tasks. The applications can be launched directly from the server or from a separate client personal computer that can access the server through a TCP connection. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) REPORTING TOOL The Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Reporting Tool provides statistics report generation for any of the events detected in the system, including counting data as well as surveillance events. You can configure the reporting template and also set up scheduled e-mail reporting. The Reporting Tool has three client applications: • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Reports Generator • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye)Reports Health Monitor • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Reports Scheduler For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) ALARM MANAGEMENT The Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Alarm Management component allows you to monitor the real-time alarms at a central station from multiple Video Analytics Servers. There are three components that enable the alarm management functionality: • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Alarm Watch Admin • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Alarm Watch Manager • Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Alarm Watch Station For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide.pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) CONFIGURATION TOOL Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) configuration tool allows you to configure the rules in each camera view for your daily surveillance or operational needs. 236 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide.pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) FORENSICS TOOL Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Forensics tool allows remote users to connect to the Video Analytics database on the server to conduct search and retrieval of past incidents. For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide.pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) LIVE MONITORING STATION Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) Live Monitoring Station allows remote users to receive live video streams with analytics annotations as well as real-time events and alarms across multiple Analytics Servers. For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide.pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. HONEYWELL VIDEO ANALYTICS (ACTIVEYE) USER CONFIGURATION Honeywell Video Analytics (ActivEye) User Configuration allows managing user accounts.All the client applications require a valid user account to log on to the server and perform various tasks For more details, refer to the Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide. To access the guide, choose Start>Programs>Honeywell Video Analytics>Documentation>Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide.pdf or locate the file in installation DVD. ADDING AN ANALYTICS SERVER To add and analytics server 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area, and then click Analytics. The Analytics Servers screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 237 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics 3. Click Add. The general settings screen appears. Figure 4-54 Analytics Server 4. In the Server Name box, type a name for the server. 5. From the Site drop-down list, select the required site. 6. In the Server IP box, type the IP address of the server where the analytics is installed. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. 7. In the Port box, type the port number to connect the server. 8. Click Save. To associate cameras to analytics 1. Click Associate Cameras. The Select camera list dialog box appears. 2. Select the cameras that have to be associated to analytics. 3. From the Analytics package settings for the selected cameras drop-down list, select the required package, and then click Set analytics package type. Note: The license information of each Honeywell Video Analytics (HVA) package is explained under the License Information section. 4. Click Associate. 5. Click Cancel to exit. The cameras are associated and displayed in the Analytical Server page. 6. Associate Events and Events Attributes. See Associating Events and Event Attributes to Analytics for more information. To disassociate cameras from analytics 238 1. In the List of Cameras configured under section, select the camera that you want to disassociate. 2. Click Disassociate Cameras. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics Setting alarm filter threshold 1. From the Alarm filter threshold drop-down list, select a severity level for the alarm threshold. Note: This severity level is applicable only for Analytics alarms. If “alarm threshold value” is 4, then the events with severity level less than 4 are not stored in the Trinity database. However, you can view these events using the ActiveEye tool. ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO ANALYTICS You can associate one or more events to a analytics server. An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the analytics server. For certain events, you can also associate event attributes. For example, for an Encoder Disabled event, you can associate attributes such as Encoder Name, Encoder ID and so on. For every attribute that you associate, you can set a value based on which the event is triggered. In the above example, you can associate the attribute Encoder Name to the event and set its value as Encoder A. When this event is associated to the video input, an alarm is raised when the event “Encoder Disabled” occurs for the Encoder Name “Encoder A”. Attributes are available only for certain events. These events can be associated to a analytics multiple times. The event attributes are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window. To view the event attributes of an alarm, right-click the alarm, and then click Show Details. To associate events to a analytics 1. Click the Events tab. The screen displays the associated events if any. 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Events dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate events from a analytics • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. To add Event Groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the Event Group. 2. Double-click on the Event Group box. Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add. 4. Click OK. To disassociate events from a analytics • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. Note: You need to add an event group before you associate it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To disable an event 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable. 2. Click the Disabled box. A drop-down list is enabled. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 239 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics 3. Select True. To assign severity level 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want assign severity level. 2. Double-click on the Severity Level box and edit the severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. To enter remarks 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks. 2. Click the Remarks box and type the remarks. To assign macros 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros. 2. Click the Start Procedure box, and then type the required macro. 3. Click the End Procedure box, and then type the required macro. A SSOCI ATING E VENT A TTRIBUT ES Before you begin • Associate events. To associate event attributes 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes. The Event attributes Settings appear in the lower pane. 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event attributes from a analytics • Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute, and then click Remove. The following table describes the event name, event attributes, and their description 240 Event Name Event Attributes Attribute Description Analytics server CPU is overloaded CPU usage in percentage CPU usage in percentage Low disk space in analytics server Free disk space in MB Available free disk space in MB Analytics server disk reaching minimum disk space Free disk space in MB Available free disk space in MB Analytics server disk is healthy Free disk space in MB Available free disk space in MB MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Analytics MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 241 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Partitions PARTITIONS ................................................................. A partition is a logical grouping of recorders, video inputs, switchers, and video outputs across various sites. Partitions are created for granting specific access rights to the users of MAXPRO VMS. You can add a new partition by specifying a unique ID and a description. After adding a partition, you can add video devices to it. You can also delete a partition when it is no longer needed. Before deleting a partition, disassociate the video devices from it and also unassign it from the user. DEFAULT PARTITION A default partition is automatically created in MAXPRO VMS and all the newly added video devices are associated to it. Since, all the new devices are a part of the default partition, all users logging on to MAXPRO VMS can view them. PARTITIONS AND USERS Partitions are associated to the users. They can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions. PARTITIONS AND ROLES Partitions are associated to roles. Roles are assigned to users. A user can view and manage the video devices that are grouped inside the associated partitions. PARTITIONS AND VIDEO DEVICES Partitions are associated to devices like cameras, recorders, switchers and monitors. Users associated to a partition can view and manage all the devices grouped inside it. PARTITIONS AND MONITORS Partitions are associated to monitors. Users associated to a partition can perform surveillance operations through monitors associated in that group. ADDING A PARTITION You can add a partition by specifying a unique identification number and a description. Note: By default, a global partition is added in MAXPRO VMS and all video devices are associated to it. To add a partition 242 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Partitions. The Partitions screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Partitions Figure 4-55 3. Click Add. By default, the Partition ID and Description are displayed. Note: 4. Partitions You can change the default Partition ID and Description. Click Save. DELETING A PARTITION You can delete a partition when you no longer need it. Before deleting a partition, ensure that you disassociate all video devices and unassign the user. Before you begin Disassociate all the devices, relays, users, and roles associated to the partition. To delete a partition 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Partitions. The Partitions screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition you want to remove. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 243 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Workstations WORKSTATIONS ................................................................. A client workstation is a computer in which the MAXPRO VMS user interface is installed. A user can log on to MAXPRO VMS interface through workstations and perform various operations. WORKSTATIONS AND USERS Users are directly associated to the workstation which is associated to the role. A user can be associated to other workstations which are not associated to a role. See Associating Workstations to the Users for more information. WORKSTATIONS AND ROLES Workstations are associated to Roles. Roles are assigned to users which enables them to log on to MAXPRO VMS interface and perform various actions. See Associating Workstations to the Roles for more information. ADDING A WORKSTATION A user can log on to MAXPRO VMS user interface through client workstation. Workstation name is the computer name of the client computer. To add a workstation 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Workstations. The Workstations screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-56 Workstations 3. Click Add. A new workstation gets added to the list. 4. Rename the workstation name if necessary. 5. Click Save. DELETING A WORKSTATION You can delete a workstation. When you delete a workstation, all the associations made to the workstation are also removed. 244 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Workstations To delete a workstation 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Workstations. The Workstations screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the workstation you want to remove. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 245 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Site SITE ................................................................. Site is a location where video input devices are situated. You can define more than one site in MAXPRO VMS. A default site is automatically created in MAXPRO VMS and all the video input devices can be associated to it. ADDING A SITE You can add a site to associate video inputs, recorders, switchers, video outputs, and workstations. To add a site 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Sites. The Sites screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-57 Sites 3. Click Add. 4. A new site gets added to the list. You can rename the site name if necessary. 5. Click Save. DELETING A SITE Before you begin • Disassociate all the associations to the site. To delete a site 246 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Sites. The Sites screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the site you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Group EVENT GROUP ................................................................. An event group is a grouping of events that occur on devices. The events that can occur vary based on the type of video devices. For example, if a video connected to a recorder is lost, an event ‘video loss’ is generated. In MAXPRO VMS, an alarm is triggered whenever an event occurs. Event groups are created for providing privileges to the users for viewing or acknowledging the events that occur on the video devices. By default, 99 Event Groups are added in MAXPRO VMS. Events that occur on the devices are grouped under different Event Groups. By default, all the events that can occur on devices are associated to Event Group 1. EVENT GROUPS AND USERS Event groups are associated to users. When any events in the event group occur, only the associated users can acknowledge it. See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information. EVENT GROUPS AND MONITORS Event groups are associated to monitors. When any event in the event group occurs, the event details are displayed in the associated monitors for viewing. See Associating Video Outputs to Event Groups for more information. ADDING AN EVENT GROUP You can add an event group to provide privileges for a user to acknowledge the events that occur on video devices. To add an event group 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Event Groups. The Event Groups screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. 4. In the Event Group ID and Description column, a default reference number and a description for the event group appear by default. 5. Click Save. DELETING AN EVENT GROUP You can delete an event group from MAXPRO VMS. Before deleting an event group, ensure that you disassociate the users and monitors from it. Before you begin • Disassociate Video Outputs. Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Video Input for more information. • Disassociate Users. See Associating Event Groups to Users for more information. To delete an event group 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Event Groups. The Event Groups screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event group you want to remove. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on the top of the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 247 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Group 5. 248 Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Intercept Keys INTERCEPT KEYS ................................................................. Frequently used or repetitive sequence of keystrokes can be automated using intercept keys. INTERCEPT KEYS AND JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS Joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboards) are associated to intercept keys. You can program the keys in the Ultrakey keyboard to perform an action by associating intercept keys to them. For example, a key can be programmed to select a panel in the salvo layout. ADDING INTERCEPT KEY To add an intercept key 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Intercept Keys. The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. The General Settings screen for Intercept Keys displays. Figure 4-58 Intercept Keys- General Settings 4. In the Intercept Key ID box, next available number is assigned by default. 5. In the Key Code box, type the key code of the key that is to be intercepted. 6. In the Intercept Key Description box, type a description for the intercept key for reference, if required. Note: 7. A default sequential Intercept Key name appears in the Intercept Key Description box. In the Key Replacement Macro box, type the desired key replacement macro. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 249 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Intercept Keys Note: 8. In the Key Release Macro box, type the desired key release macro. Note: 9. When the specified key press on the selected keyboards is detected, the Key Replacement Macro is executed. When the specified key on the selected keyboards is detected, the Key Release Macro is executed. Associate Joystick Controller. See Associating Joystick Controllers to Intercept Keys for more information. 10. Click Save. To restore default intercept keys • Click Restore. ASSOCIATING JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS TO INTERCEPT KEYS To associate joystick controller to intercept keys 1. Click the Joystick Controller tab. The Joystick Controller screen appears. 2. Click Associate. The Select Joystick Controllers dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. Note: By default, 99 joystick controllers are available in MAXPRO VMS. To disassociate joystick controller from intercept keys • Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name, and then click Remove. UPDATING INTERCEPT KEYS You can update intercept keys to change the key press number and change the description. To update intercept keys 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Intercept Keys. The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the intercept key you want to update. 4. Click Update. The general settings for the intercept key appear. You can modify the settings according to your needs. DELETING INTERCEPT KEYS To delete intercept keys 1. 250 Click the Configurator tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Intercept Keys 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Intercept Keys. The Intercept Keys screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the intercept key you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 251 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera LOGICAL CAMERA ................................................................. Logical camera selection allows cameras to be grouped together so that selection of a particular camera is made more easy for the user. Instead of selecting the camera by its number, the user can select the group the camera belongs to, followed by a number within that group. For example, Camera 1234 can instead be selected as ‘Level 1 Cameras’, ‘5’, with the name of the group (in this case Level 1 Cameras) being selected by a single button press. This speeds up and simplifies the selection of video inputs. You can add a logical camera and associate it to the Joystick Controller. Before you begin • Add Camera. See Adding a Camera for more information. • Configure Joystick Controller. Configuring joystick controller for more information. ADDING A LOGICAL CAMERA To add a logical camera 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Logical Camera. The Logical Camera screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. The Group screen for Logical Camera displays. Figure 4-59 4. In the Group ID box, type the unique ID. 5. In the Group Name box, type a name for the logical group. 6. In the Intercept Key box, type a kicked number to select the group. Note: 252 Logical Camera- General Settings Typing a number in the Intercept Key field automatically updates the Intercept Keyboard Keys table. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera 7. Specify the following details in the table. Features Description Selection Number Type a unique number within each group. It defines the number entered by the operator to select the Primary Camera in the group. There can be up to 99 different selection numbers per group. Valid values are 1 – 9999. Primary Camera Specify camera number that is selected when the operator selects a Group and a selection number within that group. Valid values are 1 – 9999, and must correspond to a camera number defined in the Video Inputs table. Primary Camera View The primary camera can also be a PTZ camera with view recall capability. In this case an actual View number can be specified. Therefore, selecting the group and selection number within that group not only displays the primary camera but also automatically moves it to the designated View preset position. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. Note: As the view number '0' is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified, view '0' can NOT be recalled by this field. Alternate Camera 1 This field defines the first alternate camera to be selected when the 'ALT' key is pressed. This camera is also selected by pressing the ? key on the keyboard after the primary camera has been selected, or the ? key after the Alternate Camera 2 has been selected. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 9999. The alternate camera 1 would have to be defined elsewhere in the video input table. A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. Alternate Camera View When Alternate Camera 1 is selected, it can automatically move to the designated View preset position. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. Note: As the view number '0' is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified, view '0' can NOT be recalled by this field. Alternate Camera 2 Define the second alternate camera to be selected when the 'ALT' key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 1. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 9999. The alternate camera 2 must be defined elsewhere in the video input table. A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. Alternate View When Alternate Camera 2 is selected, it can automatically move to the designated View preset position. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. Note: As the view number '0' is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified, view '0' can NOT be recalled by this field. Alternate Camera 3 Define the third alternate camera to be selected when the 'ALT' key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 2. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 9999. The alternate camera 3 has to be defined elsewhere in the video input table. A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 253 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera Features Description Alternate View When Alternate Camera 3 is selected, it can automatically move to the designated View preset position. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. Note: As the view number '0' is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified, view '0' cannot be recalled by this field. Alternate Camera 4 This field defines the fourth alternate camera to be selected when the 'ALT' key is pressed again after selecting alternate camera 3. The range of valid camera numbers is 1 – 9999. The alternate camera 4 would have to be defined elsewhere in the video input table. A value of 0 is the default value and indicates no alternate camera is defined. Alternate View When Alternate Camera 4 is selected it can automatically move to the designated VIEW preset position. The valid camera views range is 1 – 99, 0 is the default value which indicates no camera view is to be selected. Note: As the view number '0' is used for indicating that NO VIEW is specified, view '0' cannot be recalled by this field. Note: Pressing the ALT key continuously on the keyboard cycles around the Primary camera and Alternate cameras defined in the group. Using the upper arrow and lower arrow keys selects the next or previous camera in the group until the last defined camera has been selected. Then an “End of Sequence” message is displayed on the user’s monitor. 8. Associate Joystick Controller. See Associating Joystick Controllers to Logical Camera for more information. 9. Click Save. ASSOCIATING JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS TO LOGICAL CAMERA To associate joystick controller to logical camera 1. Click the Joystick Controller tab. The Joystick Controller screen appears. 2. Click Associate. The Select Joystick Controllers dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. Note: By default, 99 joystick controllers are available in MAXPRO VMS. To disassociate joystick controller from logical camera • 254 Select the check box corresponding to the joystick name, and then click Remove. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Logical Camera DELETING A LOGICAL CAMERA To delete logical camera 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Logical Camera. The Group screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the logical camera that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes. UPDATING LOGICAL CAMERAS You can update logical cameras to change the group name or the alternative camera. To update logical cameras 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click Logical Camera. The Group screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the logical camera you want to update. 4. Click Update. The general settings for the logical camera appear. You can modify the settings according to your needs. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 255 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE System Macros SYSTEM MACROS ................................................................. A macro is a rule or pattern that specifies how a certain input sequence (often a sequence of characters) is mapped to an output sequence or action. ADDING A SYSTEM MACRO You can add a macro to enter a single character or a word to perform a series of actions. To add a system macro 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click System Macros. The System Macros screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-60 System Macros 3. Click Add. A System Macro is added. 4. In the Description column, type a description for the system macro for reference. 5. In the Macro Execution Sequence column, type the key press sequence or special command to perform the required function. EXECUTING A SYSTEM MACRO MAXPRO VMS provides a feature to execute a system macro as and when it is created. To execute a system macro 256 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click System Macros. The System Macros screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the system macros you want to execute. The desired macro is executed. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE System Macros Note: Click Restore, to restore all the system macros to their factory default settings. The following message appears”All macros will be reset to factory default. All your modifications will be removed. Do you want to Proceed”?. Click Yes or No as applicable. DELETING A SYSTEM MACRO To delete a system macro 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Groups in the navigation area, and then click System Macros. The System Macros screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the system macros you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears on top of the display area. 5. Click Yes to remove the system macro. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 257 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups RECORDER GROUPS ................................................................. Recorder group feature distributes the load on a controller. It allows you to create different groups and associate recorders to it. Associating recorders to the groups enables, the load is distributed among the recorder controllers. You can add, update and delete recorders in a specific group. Based on the load you can create maximum number of groups and associate recorder to each group. By default five groups are displayed. ASSOCIATING RECORDER TO RECORDER GROUPS To associate recorder to recorder groups 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area, and then click Recorder Group. The Recorder Group screen appears in the display area with default recorder groups. Figure 4-61 3. 258 Recorder Group Screen Click Add. The General settings screen for Recorder Group displays. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups Figure 4-62 Recorder Group- General Settings 4. In the Recorder Group box, type a name for the recorder group. 5. In the Recorder Type drop-down list, select the recorder that you want to associate. 6. Click Save. The Associate Recorders and Disassociate Recorders buttons are activated. 7. Click Associate Recorders. The Select from list to Associate Recorder Group Server dialog box appears. Figure 4-63 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Select from list - Associate 259 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups 8. Select the required Recorder Group Server from the list and then click Associate. The list of recorders associated in a specific group is displayed under List of Recorders configured under Recorder Group. DISASSOCIATING RECORDERS FROM THE RECORDER GROUPS To dissociate recorders from the Recorder Groups 1. In the List of Recorders configured under Recorder Group, click Disassociate Recorder. The Select from list to dissociate Recorder dialog box appears. Figure 4-64 2. Select from list - Disassociate Select the Recorder from the list and then click Disassociate. The selected recorders are successfully disassociated from the Recorder Group message is displayed. UPDATING RECORDER GROUP To update a recorder group 260 1. In the Recorder Groups screen, select the required Recorder Group check boxes. 2. Click Update. The General settings screen for Recorder Group displays. Or Double-click the required recorder group from the list. The General settings screen for specific Recorder Group displays. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Recorder Groups Figure 4-65 Update Recorder Group 3. Repeat the steps 7 and step 8 of Associating recorder to Recorder Groups to associate recorder. 4. Repeat the steps of Disassociating Recorders from the Recorder Groups to disassociate recorders. 5. Click Close. DELETING RECORDER GROUP To delete the recorder groups you need to first disassociate the recorders under that group. See Disassociating Recorders from the Recorder Groups. Note: Deleting recorder group deletes the recorder service but the load is carried over to the actual controller service. To delete a recorder group 1. In the Recorder Groups screen, select the required Recorder Group check boxes. 2. Click Delete. A confirmation message Do you really want to delete selected recorder group is displayed. 3. Click Yes to delete. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 261 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller TRINITY CONTROLLER ................................................................. Trinity controller is a service which enables the system to fetch alarm status. It allows you perform PTZ operations and execute the macros. You can edit the special system parameters of the trinity controller. These fields default to values that are satisfactory for most video system applications. To update the trinity controller 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area, and then click Controller. The Controller screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Update. The Trinity Controller screen appears. Figure 4-66 4. Specify the following settings. • General Settings Settings 262 Trinity Controller Instructions/Description Name By default, the name of the server, in this case trinity controller appears. Description Type a description for the controller. Real Time Clock Accuracy (in seconds) Type a value to correct the drift in the realtime clock. After the system is installed and is operational, the number of seconds gained or lost should be measured over a 24-hour period. Type the number of seconds lost or gained in this field. The correction factor is entered using “+” for gained time, and “–“ for lost time. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller Settings Trunk Steal Criteria Instructions/Description From the drop-down list, select a priority. • Priority Level – A user can steal a trunk from another user with a lower priority. • On Alarm Only – A trunk can be stolen if an alarm condition causes a system macro to make a video selection. A user cannot steal from another, regardless of priority. • Never Steal – Trunks are assigned on a first come first serve basis, regardless of user priorities. Video trunk lines are used for carrying video signals from one system to another. These trunk lines are managed automatically by the MAXPRO VMS to service the video selection demands of the users. It is possible to run out of video trunk lines and the Trunk Steal Criteria allows the selection of the action that occurs under this congestion condition. Language • From the drop-down list, select the required language. Network Settings Settings Instructions/Description Video Level Fail (in seconds) Type a value to set the detection period time that elapses before a video level failure is reported. Valid values are 0 (immediate) to 30 seconds. Note: A video sync loss is detected immediately and is not effected by the value in the video level fail field. Network Node ID Type a unique network node ID. Valid network node numbers are 1 – 99. For a single system this value should be zero (0). Note: The “Network node ID” is not live updated to the server. Ethernet Port Number Type the port number that are used by the clients to connect to the server over the Ethernet. The default port number is 26026. The “Ethernet Port Number” is not live updated to the server. IP Address MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Type the IP Address of the server of the Server to which the controller needs to be connected. 263 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller • Macro Settings Settings Instructions/Description Cold Boot Macro Type the desired macro. When the MAXPRO VMS Server is powered up or reset, the Cold Boot macro sequence is executed following all the normal system and equipment initialization. Note: Cold Boot can be initiated from MAXPRO VMS (Cold Boot button in the Trinity Controller page). Warm Boot Macro Type the desired macro. When the MAXPRO VMS Server receives a reset command, the Warm Boot macro sequence is executed following all the normal system and equipment initialization. Note: Warm Boot can be initiated from MAXPRO VMS (Cold Boot button in the Trinity Controller page). Printer Fail Macro Type the desired macro. When the MAXPRO VMS Server detects the hard-copy printer is no longer online, the Printer Fail Macro sequence is executed. 5. Select the Master Network Clock check box to select this node in a networked system to be the master clock. Selecting this check box ensures that once in every hour, all the other network nodes have the time and date synchronized to this node’s clock. Note: 264 Only one network node in the system is permitted to be the master clock source. 6. Select the Forward Net Broadcast check box to suppress the forwarding of incoming broadcast messages. 7. Specify the settings for the following tabs. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller • • Display Settings Settings Instructions/Description Text Type /Height The rows on the table represent the different text type and heights that can be selected for display. Five (5) lines of normal height text or three (3) lines of double height text can be displayed. • Monitor Normal – normal height text displayed on monitors. • Monitor Double – double height text displayed on monitors. • VCR/Other Normal – normal height text displayed on VCRs and other video output devices. • VCR/Other Double – double height test displayed on VCRs and other video output devices. • Pretext Normal – normal height text inserted by pretext subracks. • Pretext Double – double height text inserted by pretext subracks. Information Lines The columns on the table represent the types of information that are displayed as text. Not all information line types are available for every text type and height. • Real Time Clock Line – defines the line where the Real Time Clock is displayed. • Video Source Description – defines the line where the video input device description is displayed. • Monitor/Keyboard Description – defines the line where the monitor description is displayed. When an operator selects the monitor this text is replaced with Keyboard description or the User description. • Mode Line – defines the line where the mode text (for example, scan mode) is displayed. • Message Line – defines the line where the message line text (for example, warning message) is displayed. Other Settings Settings Instructions/Description Auto Message Timeout (in seconds) Type a value to define the time period for the automatic display of automatic message line text. Valid values are 2-9 9 seconds. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 265 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller Settings Instructions/Description Pretext Message Timeout (in seconds) Type a value to define the time period for the automatic display of pretext message line text. Valid values are 2-99 seconds. Default Test Mode From the drop-down list, select the required test mode. • Normal – displays the system Configuration Summary. • Rx data – displays the data received on all the MAXPRO VMS Server serial communication ports. • TX data – displays the data transmitted from all the MAXPRO VMS Server serial communication ports. • Execute Macros – displays all the macro sequences executed by the system. • Macro Trails – displays the macro trail of the executed macro sequence on the screen. • Error log – displays all the subsequent entries to the error log file on the screen. • Printer – displays all the subsequent output to the hard-copy printer on the screen. • Video Select – displays every video switching action in the system. • Control – displays every control action for PTZ cameras, VCRs and so on. • Auto Number – no data is displayed on the menu output in this test mode. However, if this mode is selected, the description text displayed on video output show the logical device number of the device at the start of the text line. Note: When the system is running, the menu output can be selected to display any of the test modes by selecting ALT-F1 to ALT-F10 on the Qwerty keyboard. Equipment Polling – Failed Macro • • Select an Equipment Polling status. In the Equipment Fail Macro box, type the desired macro. Types of equipment that can be polled are: • Subracks • High Level /Mimic Panels • Keyboards • Network nodes 266 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Trinity Controller Settings Instructions/Description Pretext Status Select the required pretext status. Note: All the pretext modules in the system must be of the standard or enhanced type. It is not possible to mix types. This does not apply to post text modules, which are defined, in the video outputs section. You can select the Enhanced Text Card or the Hidden Text Card, but not both. The Shadow and Double Height features can both be selected for either type text card. • Printer- Errorlog Reporting Settings 8. Instructions/Description Event Group Type the required event group. Errorlog Printing Select Errorlog Printing if you want to send the error log messages to printer. Sign On/Off Select Sign On/Off to send a report to printer whenever a user is signed on or signed off. Errorlog Reporting Select the type of error log messages that needs to be sent to the printer. Click Save to change the updates. COLD BOOT AND WARM BOOT You can perform cold boot or warm boot of the MAXPRO VMS Controller. 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area, and then click Controller. The Controller screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Update. The Trinity Controller screen appears. 4. Click Cold Boot to restart the MAXPRO VMS Controller. Or Click Warm Boot to reinitialize all the devices connected to the MAXPRO VMS without any restart or shutdown of MAXPRO VMS Server. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 267 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port SERIAL PORT ................................................................. Serial port is a communication interface with which information is transferred in or out one bit at a time. Serial ports are added to MAXPRO VMS server for communication with joystick controllers (Ultrakey keyboards), Switchers, and Protocol Interface Translators (PIT). You can add up to 20 serial ports in MAXPRO VMS server. ADDING A SERIAL PORT To add a serial port 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Servers branch in the navigation area, and then click Serial Ports. The Serial Ports screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. A Joystick screen appears. Figure 4-67 4. 268 Joystick Specify the Basic Settings. The following table lists the basic settings. Field Description COM Port Number The reference number of the serial port. There can be up to 20 ports defined in a single system. Port Name The port name that you want to assign. Ensure that the port name does not exceed 18-characters. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port Field Description Port Type The type of the serial port. You can select the port type from the drop-down list. The ports types are: • Joystick Controller • VB PIT • Auxiliary (Max Pro) • Error log - The error logged in the error log file is sent through the serial port. Only one port can be selected for errorlog data. • Analog -Mimic Panel • Serial Network • Serial Printer - The system hard copy print output is redirected to the serial port if this option is selected. Only one port can be selected as a printer port. • MaxPro Switcher • IO-Control (VideoBlox) • Auxiliary Control (VideoBlox) • Pre-Tilter • Test (Not recommended) MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 269 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port 5. Select the Advanced Settings check box, to specify the advance settings. The following table lists the advanced settings. Field Description ID 1 to ID 8 These fields are used for limiting the amount of data that is transmitted from a selected port. Placing a number in any of these fields only transmits data to the equipment of selected type with that ID number. The ID1 field allows the value ALL to be entered, which enables all data of the selected type to be transmitted, regardless of the ID number. Selecting ALL clears all the other ID fields. The valid ID range for the selected port types are: • Keyboard ID 1 – 99 • Subrack ID 1 – 799 • Network ID 1 – 255 • Highlevel/Mimic ID 1 – 99 Enter the value in each ID field and press ENTER. Note: This is not applicable for VideoBlox. For VideoBlox subrack (ID3 – ID4), these two fields represent the video loss source device type. • 0 & 0 represents video loss source device is Input cards. • 0 & 1 represents video loss source device is Concentrator. • 1 & 0 represents video loss source device is MVT or pretext devices. • 1 & 1 represents no device as video loss source device. For VideoBlox subrack (ID6), this ID represents the version of matrix switcher hardware for audio switching. 1 represents the old VideoBlox matrix switcher hardware. For VideoBlox subrack (ID7), this ID represents the version of matrix switcher hardware for video switching. 1 represents the old VideoBlox matrix switcher hardware. 6. 270 Specify the COM Port Settings. The following table lists the COM port settings. Field Description Baud Rate The rate at which data is transferred through the port. By default, a baud rate of 19.2K is available for the port. To change the baud rate, select the desired baud rate from the drop-down list. Stay Alive Indicates if the MAXPRO-NET Server is functioning. When you enable this check box, an ACK character is transmitted from the port every 2 seconds. By default, the function is disabled. Select Enabled or Disabled setting from the drop-down list. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Serial Port 7. Field Description Xon/Xoff If this option is enabled, Xon and Xoff characters are transmitted to resume and stop the data flow (Software handshaking). Xon/Xoff is enabled by default. To change the setting, select the desired setting /from the drop-down list. Data Bit The number of data bits per character can be selected as 7 or 8. The default value is 7. To change the data bits setting, select the desired setting from the drop-down list. Stop Bit The number of stop bits per character can be selected as 1 or 2. The default value is 1. Parity The type of parity to be used by the port can be selected as Even, Odd, or None. The Default is even parity. To change the parity setting, select the desired setting from the drop-down list. The value can also be typed into the field. Click Save. Note: Click Restore Default to restore the default settings. UPDATING A SERIAL PORT You can update the serial port when you want to change the basic, advanced, and COM port settings. To update a serial port 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Server in the navigation area. 3. Click the Serial Ports branch. The serial ports screen appears in the display area. 4. Select the check box corresponding serial port you want to update, and then click Update. 5. Modify the Basic Settings. 6. Modify the Advanced Settings. 7. Modify the COM Port Settings. 8. Click Save. DELETING A SERIAL PORT To delete a serial port 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Server in the navigation area. 3. Click the Serial Ports branch. The list of existing serial ports is displayed on the screen. 4. Select the check box corresponding to the serial port you want to delete. 5. Click Delete. A message asking for confirmation appears on the top of the display area. 6. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 271 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE User Defined Events USER DEFINED EVENTS ................................................................. The devices such as recorders and cameras have predefined events. MAXPRO VMS provides an option to customize new events to recorders and cameras. These events can be mapped to an external source to trigger an alarm whenever an event occurs. Note: For more information on mapping the events, contact your system administrator. To add and associate an event to devices 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Associations in the navigation area, and then click User Defined Events. The User defined event association screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add & Associate. The Associated Devices dialog box appears. Figure 4-68 Associate Devices 4. From the Device filter drop-down list, select the required device category. The device number and the name of the device are listed. 5. Select the check box corresponding to the name of the device for which you want to define an event, and then click Associate. The device appears on the User defined event association screen. Note: You can select multiple device names by selecting multiple check boxes. 6. In the Global Event ID box, type the unique global ID. If the Global Event ID is not assigned, MAXPRO VMS assigns a unique global ID automatically when you save the event. 7. In the Event Description box, type a description for the event. 8. In the Start Procedure box, type the required macro to start the event. 9. In the End Procedure box, type the required macro to end the event. 10. Click the Disabled box, and then select True or False from the drop-down list. 11. Click the Severity Level box and edit the severity level. 272 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE User Defined Events Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set to 50 on the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. 12. Click the Normal State box and define the alarm normal state as Closed or Open. 13. Click the Operating Mode box and select the operating mode for the alarm. The available modes are: • Direct - The alarm condition activates or de-activates when it physically changes state, or is set or cleared with macros. • Latched - Once triggered the alarm will remain active until it is reset manually using the alarm clear key on the keyboard. • Toggle - The first time the alarm is triggered it becomes active, the next time it is cleared. To add a system generated event 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Associations in the navigation area, and then click User Defined Events. The User defined event association screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. Follow steps 6 through 11 of See To add and associate an event to devices. To add Event Groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the device name for which you want to add the Event Group. 2. Double-click the Event Group box. The Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add. 4. Click OK. Note: You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To delete user defined events 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand the Associations branch in the navigation area, and then click User Defined Events. The User defined event association screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. A message asking for confirmation appears. 5. Click Yes. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 273 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Association EVENT ASSOCIATION ................................................................. The devices such as recorders and cameras have predefined events. MAXPRO VMS provides an option to associate events to a set of cameras and recorders at one stretch with just a few mouse clicks. Note: Use this feature to do bulk association of events to a set of cameras and recorders. To associate events to cameras and recorders 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Associations in the navigation area, and then click Event Association. The Event Association screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-69 Event Association 3. Select “Recorder” or “Video Input” under Event Type Filter. 4. From the Device Types drop-down list, select the required device. Based on the device selected, the following information appears. • The list of events associated to a device are listed in the Events table. • The number of devices corresponding to the selected device are listed under Devices. 5. From the Site drop-down list, select a site. 6. In the Events table, select the check box for the events you want to associate to the device. To associate all the events to a device, select the top level check box located in the header section of the Events table. 7. To complete the device event association, perform the following: • To associate one device at a time with the selected events, under Devices, select a camera and then click 274 . The selected camera appears under Associated Devices. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Event Association • • Click to associate all the devices to the selected events. All the devices appear under Associated Devices. To remove a device, under Associated List, select a check box corresponding to the device, and then click 8. . The selected device appears under Devices. • Click to disassociate all the devices to Devices. Click Save to save the information. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 275 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Migration MIGRATION ................................................................. MAXPRO VMS supports data migration of mpn and max files from legacy applications like MaxproNet. Enterprise NVR configuration data can be migrated into MAXPRO VMS using the HLI file. You can also export the MAXPRO VMS configuration whenever required. From MAXPRO VMS R200 onwards, you can export or import the configuration file of the previous versions of the MAXPRO VMS. EXPORTING THE FILES To export the database 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Migrations in the navigation area, and then click Export. The Export screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-70 3. Exporting Database In the Export Path box, click the ellipses button to select a path. Or If you want to export the files to a network location, click the ellipses button, specify the path, and then click Load. 4. Click Export. IMPORTING THE DATABASE To import the database 276 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Migrations in the navigation area, and then click Import. The Import screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera Figure 4-71 Importing Database 3. From the Source Type drop-down list, select the required database type. 4. In the Import Path box, click the ellipses button to select the location. Or If you want to import the files to a network location, click the ellipses button, specify the path, and then click Load 5. In the IP Address/ Hostname box, type the IP address or host name of the Enterprise recorder from which mapping has been done in the enterprise HLI file that is being imported. Note: 5. The IP Address/ Hostname box appears only when you select Enterprise HLI as the source type. Click Import. Note: When you change the IP address of an Enterprise recorder, after importing the HLI file, a message asking for confirmation to delete sub devices appears. If you click Yes, the hybrid cameras revert to analog cameras. The VCR entries are missed and hence, you have to import .mpn and .ini file once again to retain the settings of Maxpronet and HLI. However, the Digital Input Trunk remains unchanged. If you click No, the settings of hybrid camera does not change. It is recommended to click No when the message asking for confirmation appears to deflect sub devices. EQUIP SERIES CAMERA ................................................................. You can upgrade, assign a new IP, and also check the version details of the Equip series cameras that are connected to MAXPRO VMS. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 277 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera To discover Equip series cameras 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area, and then click Equip Series. The Equip Series screen appears in the display area displaying the list of discovered cameras by the system. Figure 4-72 Equip Series Cameras VERSION To check the version 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area, and then click Equip Series. The Equip Series screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the cameras for which you want to check version. 4. Click Version. FIRMWARE UPGRADE To upgrade the firmware 278 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area, and then click Equip Series. The Equip Series screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Upgrade. The upgrade options appear in the lower pane. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera Figure 4-73 Upgrade Options 4. From the Please select camera type to upgrade drop-down list, select the required Equip series camera. The available cameras for the Equip series are displayed. 5. Select the check box corresponding to the cameras that you want to upgrade firmware. 6. In the Select firmware upgrade file box, click the ellipses button, and then select the firmware upgrade file. 7. Click Start. A confirmation message appears. 8. Click OK. ASSIGNING IP ADDRESS To assign IP address 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area, and then click Equip Series. The Equip Series screen appears in the display area. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the cameras for which you want to assign IP address. 4. Click IP Assign. The IP assign options appear in the lower pane. 5. In the Enter Starting IP Address box, type the starting IP address for the camera. The next available IP address from the one that is entered is assigned to cameras that are selected. 6. In the Subnet Mask box, type the subnet mask for the camera. 7. In the Default Gateway box, type the default gateway for the camera. 8. Click Start. AUTOMATICALLY OBTAINING IP ADDRESS FOR A CAMERA To obtain an IP address 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand IP Camera Management in the navigation area, and then click Equip Series. The Equip Series screen appears in the display area. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 279 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Equip Series Camera 3. Double-click the camera for which you want to obtain an IP address. The general settings for the camera appear. Figure 4-74 4. Select the Obtain an IP Address automatically check box, and then click Save. A confirmation message appears. 5. Click OK. Note: 280 Camera General Settings You can also edit the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway if the camera has a static IP address. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Scheduler SCHEDULER ................................................................. You can create jobs in MAXPRO VMS to back up data and also to clean up the database. You can associate these jobs to schedulers. MAXPRO VMS currently has a default scheduler and it is recommended to retain the default settings. UPDATING A SCHEDULER To update a scheduler 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Scheduling in the navigation area, and then click Scheduler. The Scheduler screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Update. The Scheduler General Settings screen appears. Figure 4-75 Scheduler General Settings 4. In the IP Address box, the default IP address displays. You can type a new IP address as applicable. 5. In the Port Number box, the default port number displays. You can type a new port number as applicable. 6. In the Description box, the default description displays. You can type a new description for the scheduler as applicable. 7. Associate Partitions. See Associating Partitions to Scheduler for more information. 8. Associate Events. Associating Events and Event Attributes to a Scheduler for more information. 9. Click Save. ASSOCIATING EVENTS AND EVENT ATTRIBUTES TO A SCHEDULER You can associate one or more events to the scheduler. An alarm is triggered whenever any of the associated event occurs for the scheduler. For certain events, you can also associate event attributes. For example, for an Scheduler Job Failed event, you can associate attributes such as Scheduler Name, Scheduler Description and so on. For every attribute that you associate, you can set a value based on which the event is triggered. In the above example, you can associate the attribute Scheduler Name to the event and set its value as Scheduler A. When MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 281 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Scheduler this event is associated to the scheduler, an alarm is raised when the event “Scheduler Job Failed” occurs for the Scheduler Name “Scheduler A”. To associate events to a scheduler 1. Click the Events tab. The screen displays the associated events, if any. Figure 4-76 Scheduler Events 2. Click Associate. The Select From List dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate events from a scheduler • Select the check box corresponding to the event, and then click Remove. The events are disassociated from the scheduler To add Event Groups to events 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to add the Event Group. 2. Double-click on the Event Group box. The Select Event Groups dialog box appears. 3. Click the check box corresponding to the Event Group you want to add. 4. Click OK. Note: You need to add an event group before you associates it to an event. See Adding an Event Group for more information. To disable an event 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to disable. 2. Click on the Disabled box. A drop-down list is enabled. 3. Select True to disable the event. To assign severity level 282 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Scheduler 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign the severity level. 2. Double-click on the Severity Level box and edit the severity level. Note: Severity level is set to trigger alarms when the threshold is met. For example, if the threshold is set 50 in the preferences tab, an alarm is triggered when threshold becomes 51. To enter remarks 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to enter remarks. 2. Click the Remarks box and type the remarks To assign macros 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event you want to assign macros. 2. Click the Start Procedure box, and then type the required macro. 3. Click the End Procedure box, and then type the required macro. A SSOCI ATING E VENT A TTRIBUT ES Before you begin • Associate events. To associate event attributes 1. Select the check box corresponding to the event for which you want to associate event attributes. The Event attributes settings appear in the lower pane. 2. Click Associate. The Select Available Event Attributes dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the event attributes that you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate event attributes from a video input • Select the check box corresponding to the event attribute, and then click Remove. ASSOCIATING PARTITIONS TO SCHEDULER You can associate partitions to a scheduler. Associating a partition to a scheduler restricts a non- associated user of the partition from viewing the scheduler or changing the settings of the scheduler. You can associate more than one partition to a scheduler. Before you begin • Add a Partition. See Adding a Partition for more information. To associate partitions to a scheduler 1. Click the Partitions tab. The screen displays the associated partitions, if any. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 283 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Scheduler Figure 4-77 Scheduler Partitions 2. Click Associate. The Select Partitions dialog box appears. 3. Select the check box corresponding to the partition name you want to associate. 4. Click OK. To disassociate partitions from a scheduler • 284 Select the check box corresponding to the partition name, and then click Remove. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Jobs JOBS ................................................................. Jobs are tasks that are automatically executed at a stipulated time and date. Jobs can be scheduled to clean up database and back up the database. The frequency to perform the tasks can be defined. Only a user with admin rights can create jobs in MAXPRO VMS. ADDING JOBS You can add a job to clean up the database or backup the data. To add a job 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Scheduling in the navigation area, and then click Job. The Job screen appears in the display area. 3. Click Add. The Schedule Job screen appears. Figure 4-78 Schedule Job 4. In the Job Name box, type the name for the job. 5. From the Operation drop-down list, select Database Cleanup or Database Backup. 6. From the Scheduler drop-down list, select the required scheduler. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 285 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Jobs 7. On the Job Settings tab, specify the settings. The following table lists the settings for both Database Cleanup and Database Backup Settings Instructions Database Backup • In the Backup Path At Server box, type the path to back up the data. Note: The backup path must not contain any spaces in the directory name. • In the Backup Type section, click Full Backup or Differential Backup as per your requirement. Note: Differential backup contains all files changed since the last full backup. Ensure that a full back up is taken at least once before the differential back. Database Cleanup • • Select Event History or Audit Log or both as per the requirement. In the Cleanup Criteria, select All if you want to clean up all records in the database. or • Select Last, and then type the number of days from when the records should be cleaned. For example, if you type 30, then the records of the last 30 days are cleaned. or • Select Last, and then type the number of records to be cleaned. For example, if you type 30, then the last 30 records that were created are deleted. 8. 286 On the Frequency tab, specify the following settings. Settings Instructions Start From Specify the start date and time. End By Specify the end date and time. No End Date Select this option if you do not want any end date for any schedules. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Jobs 9. Settings Instructions Frequency You can choose from a set of frequencies that are available. The available frequencies are: • Now - to run a job at that point of time. • Once - to run a job once. • Hourly - to run a job every hour. • Daily - to run a job daily. • Weekly - to run a job weekly. Select a day on which you want the job to run. • Monthly - to run a job monthly. In the Every___of every___Month(s), type the day on which the job has to be performed every month. • Yearly - to run a job yearly. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 287 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Notification ALARM NOTIFICATION ................................................................. The alarms that are triggered can be notified to users. You can select a device, its events, and associate it to a contact group. The users belonging to the contact group receive a notification whenever a selected event occurs and an alarm is triggered. To configure an alarm notification 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Scheduling in the navigation area, and then click Alarm Notification. The Alarm Notification screen appears. Figure 4-79 Alarm Notification 288 3. From the Step 1: Select Site drop-down list, select required site. 4. From the Step 2: Select device types drop-down list, select the required device type. The related devices, the associated events, the available user contact group and the available devices are displayed. 5. In the Step 3: Select Analytics Server, select the required analytics server. 6. In the Step 4: Select available Events, select the required events. If you want to select all the events, click Select All. 7. In the Step 5: Select available user contact group, select the contact group check box for which the alarm notification needs to be sent. If you want to select all the user contact groups, click Select All. 8. In the Step 6: Select available devices, select the required available devices check box. You can click Expand All to expand the devices tree. Similarly you can click Collapse All to collapse the devices tree. If you want to select all the available devices, click Select All. 9. Click Save. The selected events for which alarm notification needs to be sent is displayed in the Events Configured for notification section as shown below. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Notification Figure 4-80 Events Configured for notification Removing events from alarm notification 1. In the Events Configured for notification section, select the required events. 2. Click Remove. FILTERING THE EVENTS CONFIGURED To filter the events configured 1. In the Events Configured for Notification, select the filter from the drop down list as shown below. Or Type the filter name in the box. The specified events are displayed in the table. Figure 4-81 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Filtering the Events Configured 289 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Alarm Notification 2. Click Save. ATTACHING CLIP You can attach a clip to the event configured for the notification. To attach a clip to an event 1. In the Events Configured for Notification table, double-click on the required event under Attach Clip as shown below. A drop-down list is displayed Figure 4-82 2. 290 Attaching Clip Select True to attach the clip and then click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE SMTP Server Settings SMTP SERVER SETTINGS ................................................................. To configure SMTP settings 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Scheduling in the navigation area, and then click SMTP Server Setting. The SMTP Server Settings screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-83 SMTP Server Settings 3. In the Host Name box, type a host name. Click Ping to verify the connection. The field appears in green if the IP address or the host name is valid. 4. In the Port Number box, the port number displays by default. 5. In the User Name box, type a name for the user. 6. In the Password text box, type a password for the user. Note: 7. Select the Use Default Credentials check box, if you want to use the credentials that were used while logging on. In the From box, type the email address that should appear when an email is sent. Note: Select Stop Sending Email, if you do not want to send an email from the configured settings. 8. Select the Enable SSL check box to enable the SSL settings. 9. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 291 4 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Creating an Email Template CREATING AN EMAIL TEMPLATE ................................................................. You can create an email template in MAXPRO VMS and use it while sending email notification about alarms to users. To configure email template 1. Click the Configurator tab. 2. Expand Scheduling in the navigation area, and then click Email Template. The Email Template screen appears in the display area. Figure 4-84 Email Template 3. From the Text Type drop-down list, select required text type for sending an email. The default text type is “HTML”. 4. In the Subject box, the default subject that appears in an e-mail displays. You can type a new subject as per your requirement. 5. In the Email Title Logo1 and Email Title Logo2, do one of the following: a. Click Browse to browse and select the title logo image for the e-mail. b. Click Default to retain the default logo image. c. Click No Logo to remove the selected or default logo image. Note: The dimension for Email Logo 1 should be 900 X 50 and for Email logo 2 should be 400 X 50. 6. In the Heading Text box, the default heading text displays. You can type a new heading text as per your requirement. 7. In the Message to User box, type the required message to user if any. 8. In the Signature box, provide the signature. 9. In the No Reply Info box, type the no reply message to the user if any. 10. In the Contact Info box, type the contact details for user to communicate. 292 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Creating an Email Template 11. In the Disclaimer Text box, the default disclaimer text displays. You can type a new disclaimer text as per your requirement. 12. Click Preview if you want to preview the e-mail. Note: Click Reset, if you want to reset the email template. 13. Click Save. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 293 4 294 CONFIGURING DEVICES AND SETTING UP A SITE Creating an Email Template MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 5 VERIFYING THE CONFIGURATION OF MAXPRO VMS ..... ................................... OVERVIEW ................................................................. Verifying the configuration of the MAXPRO VMS is the final phase in the commissioning process. In this phase, you need to verify the working of the MAXPRO VMS. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ensure that the configuration of the MAXPRO VMS is complete. ACTIVITIES TO PERFORM IN THIS PHASE In this phase, using the MAXPRO VMS user interface, perform the tasks listed in the following table to verify the configuration in VMS Server. Task See... Connection with the MAXPRO VMS server (logging on) page 303 Device listing in the Devices window page 304 Live video display from cameras page 306 Playback of recorded video page 307 Inserting comments and marking the point of interest using the bookmark feature in Timeline window page 309 Playback of loop (mark in and mark out feature) in Timeline window page 310 Panning, tilting, and zooming functions (analog PTZ and Digital PTZ) page 311 Acknowledgement of alarms and clearing of alarms page 312 Image creation page 314 Clip creation page 315 Sending and receiving operator messages page 316 Video from the surrounding cameras (video pursuit or surrounding cameras feature in MAXPRO VMS) page 317 Saving the salvo layout using the salvo view feature page 318 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 301 5 302 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Overview Task See... Device listing in My Devices window page 319 Searching recorded video page 320 Generating and viewing the event and operator log report page 321 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Connection with MAXPRO VMS server CHECKING THE CONNECTION WITH MAXPRO VMS SERVER ................................................................. The MAXPRO VMS can consist of one or more servers. You can save the address of each server in profiles from the Log On dialog box that appears when you start MAXPRO VMS. The Log On dialog box is illustrated in the following figure. Figure 5-1 MAXPRO VMS Log on To connect to a MAXPRO VMS R310 server from the client computer 1. Click the language selection option, and then select the required language from the dropdown list. The supported languages are Chinese, German, French, and Arabic. The default language is English. Note: You can localize the language using the localization tool. For more details, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Localization Guide. pdf which is available on the DVD. 2. In the Username box, type the user name. The default user name is “admin”. 3. In the Password box, type the password. The default password for the default user name “admin” is “trinity”. 4. In the Profile box, select the profile in which the server address is saved. 5. Click . The MAXPRO VMS dialog box is displayed. You can set a profile as the default profile. When a profile is set as default, you need not select the profile each time you log on to MAXPRO VMS. You can also modify and delete profiles. Note: Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to save server addresses in profiles, how to set a profile as default profile, and how to modify and delete profiles. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 303 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Device Listing in the Devices Window CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN THE DEVICES WINDOW ................................................................. By default, the Viewer tab is selected when you log on to MAXPRO VMS. The Devices window lists the recorders, and switchers along with the cameras connected to them in a tree structure. Similarly sequences are listed in the Sequences window, salvo views are listed in the Views window, and monitors are listed in the Monitors window. A drop-down box on the top of the Devices window and Monitors window lists the partitions. The following figure illustrates the Viewer tab. Figure 5-2 Viewer tab Ensure that all the devices, sequences, and salvo views added to the MAXPRO VMS are listed in the respective windows. To view the list of devices, monitors, sequences, and salvo views that are added: • Click the required tab, in the Viewer. The devices, monitors, sequences, and salvo views are displayed in a tree view. For example, if you want to view the sequences, click the Sequences tab. The Sequences window appears with the list of sequences displayed in a tree structure. The sites that are associated to the monitors are also displayed in the Monitors window. To view the list of devices and monitors for all the partitions • 304 In the drop down box, on the top of the Devices window, select All Partitions. The devices associated to the partition are displayed. Similarly, on the top of the Monitors window, select All Partitions. The monitors associated to the partition are displayed. The icons next to the devices in the Devices window indicate the status and type of each device. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Device Listing in the Devices Window Note: Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on the Viewer tab. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 305 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Live Video from Cameras CHECKING THE LIVE VIDEO FROM CAMERAS ................................................................. To ensure that all the cameras are connected and functioning properly, you need to check for live video from them. To select the cameras and view live video • Double-click the camera in the Devices window or My Devices window. You can also drag the camera on a panel in the salvo layout. The panel starts displaying live video and the label Live appears over the video display. The camera can also be selected using the virtual keyboard and joystick controller. You can select multiple cameras and view live video in different panels of the salvo layout. Note: 306 Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to view live video from cameras. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Playback of Recorded Video CHECKING THE PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO ................................................................. To playback video, the recording from the camera must be available and the recording settings for the camera must be configured. You can find out the status of the camera by the colored indicator on the camera icon in the site view. If the indicator on the camera icon is green means the camera is active. If the indicator on the camera is red means it is recording. Note: Refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help for more information on how to configure the recording settings for the cameras connected to the various recorders. Recorded video can be played from the Timeline window. The following figure illustrates the Timeline window. Figure 5-3 Time line window When you select a camera to view video, a timeline corresponding to the camera appears in the Timeline window. The name of the camera appears on the left of the timeline. To play recorded video from a camera, you can click the timeline at the point from which you want to play video. A timescale is displayed in the lower part of the Timeline window. You can refer to the divisions in the timescale to locate the date and time. You can also select a date and time from which you want to play recorded video using the date and time options in the timeline window. Color codes are used in the timeline to indicate the availability of video recording for the cameras connected to the recorder. The time duration for which recording is available is indicated in green color. The time duration for which recording is not available is indicated in white color. For cameras connected to other recorders such as Rapid Eye, Fusion, Enterprise and Intellex, the color codes are not displayed in the timeline. However, you can click a point in the timeline to play recorded video. The label Rec is displayed in red color on the panel displaying recorded video from a camera. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 307 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Playback of Recorded Video Note: 308 For more information on how to play recorded video from the Timeline window and how to use the player controls, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Bookmark Feature CHECKING THE BOOKMARK FEATURE ................................................................. The bookmark feature is used for marking points of interest in a video recording. Comments are added to the bookmarks and they appear as ToolTips in the timeline at marked points. They are helpful while reviewing recorded video. The bookmarks can be cut or copied and pasted at different points in the timeline. Operators can selectively view video by browsing from one bookmark to another in a timeline. The following figure illustrates bookmarks added to the timeline. Figure 5-4 Note: Bookmarks For more information on how to add, edit, cut, copy, paste, and delete bookmarks and on how to browse between bookmarks, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 309 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Playback Loop in the Timeline Window CHECKING THE PLAYBACK LOOP IN THE TIMELINE WINDOW ................................................................. Loops are used for repeatedly playing a portion of video. Mark in and mark out points are used to create a loop in the Timeline window. You can add a mark in point to mark the start date and time of the loop in the timeline. To mark the end date and time of the loop, add a mark out point in the timeline. The following figure illustrates a loop in the timeline. Figure 5-5 Note: 310 Loops For more information on how to create loops by adding mark in and mark out points and how to play a loop, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Panning, Tilting, and Zooming CHECKING THE PANNING, TILTING, AND ZOOMING ................................................................. In MAXPRO VMS, you can perform two types of PTZ namely, analog PTZ and Digital PTZ. Using the digital PTZ feature in MAXPRO VMS, you can perform tilting and zooming on live and recorded video and clips. You can also perform panning operations on live video and clips. The digital PTZ feature when enabled allows you to perform panning and tilting on the video display that is zoomed or enlarged in a panel. You need to perform both analog and digital PTZ on cameras to verify the functioning. Note: For more information on how to perform analog and digital PTZ, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 311 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking for Acknowledgement and Clearing of Alarms CHECKING FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CLEARING OF ALARMS ................................................................. Alarms notify the occurrence of events and event attributes to the operators. You can configure alarms to be triggered when events such as recorder disk space nearing full, motion detection, and others happen. The event attributes that are associated to events are listed in the details of the alarm in Alarm window. The events that trigger an alarm can be selected while configuring the recorders, cameras, and switchers. Events can be associated to event groups. Each alarm goes through the following states. New or Unacknowledged When an alarm is triggered it appears in the Alarm window. You can click the Alarm tab to view the Alarm window. The state of the alarm after it is triggered is referred to as unacknowledged. You can view the list of all the unacknowledged alarms in a table in the Alarm window. The following figure illustrates the Alarm window. Figure 5-6 Alarm window The number of unacknowledged alarms is displayed in a blinking mode in the status bar in red color. For example, Alarms (10) indicate that there are ten unacknowledged alarms. You can select various options using the context menu or shortcut menu by right clicking on the Alarms window. The options include: 312 • Acknowledge (ACK) • Clear on ACK • Ack all • Show Video • Show Preview Pane • Show Details • Freeze • Receive Alarms Only • Receive Events Only MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking for Acknowledgement and Clearing of Alarms • Receive both Alarms and Events Acknowledge An acknowledged alarm indicates that the operator has taken the action. After acknowledging the alarm, it is moved to the acknowledged alarms list in the Alarm window. You can also use the Acknowledge button below Alarms window. To clear acknowledged alarms, use the Clear button below Acknowledged list window. Clear on ACK This option clears the alarms which are acknowledged. Ack all This option acknowledges all the alarms at once. Show Video Select this option if you want to view video from which the alarm was generated. Show Preview Pane This option gives you four windows which display alarms which are on, pre-alarm, post alarm, and live alarm videos. Show Details This option displays the Alarm Details window. The Alram Details window displays the details of description of the alarm, Device name, Date time, Alarm State, Global Event ID and the Event attributes. Freeze Select this option if you no longer wish to receive alarms. Receive Alarms Only Select this option if you want to receive only alarms. Receive Events Only Select this option if you want to receive only Events. Receive both Alarms and Events Select this option receive both alarms and events. Note: For more information on how to acknowledge and clear alarms, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 313 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking for the Creation of Images CHECKING FOR THE CREATION OF IMAGES ................................................................. A frame of video displayed in the panel can be saved as an image. The image can be saved in Bitmapped Graphics (BMP), Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPG) format, Portable Graphics format (PNG), and Graphics Interchange Format (GIF). Only the images saved in the ImagesAndClips folder at the location in the hard drive in which MAXPRO VMS files are installed can be viewed in the Image/ Clip window. You can double-click the image view option in the Image/Clip window to view images on the salvo layout. You can also select the image size large, medium, and small as per the requirement. For example, X:\ProgramFiles\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\ImagesAndClips. Here, X: is the disk drive. The following figure illustrates the Image/Clip window. Figure 5-7 Image/Clip window The images can also be saved in other folders on the computer. Note: 314 For more information on how to save and view images, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Creation of Clips CHECKING THE CREATION OF CLIPS ................................................................. Clips can be created from recorded video and saved in MP4, MPG, AVI, and WMV format depending on the format supported by the recorders. Only the clips saved in the ImagesAndClips folder at the location in the hard drive in which MAXPRO VMS files are installed can be viewed in the Image/ Clip window. For example, X:\ProgramFiles\Honeywell\TrinityFramework\ImagesAndClips. Here, X: is the hard drive. The clips can also be saved in other folders on the computer. The clips can be saved with digital signatures. Digital signatures ensure authenticity of clips. Digital signatures are primarily used to authenticate videos that are produced in courts as evidence. A digital signature generates a unique string for the clip using algorithms recommended by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standards. If the video in the clip is modified, a verification check for the unique string fails indicating that the content is tampered. When a clip is saved with the digital signature, a package file with the.PKG extension is created to save the clip. Note: For more information on how to save and view images, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 315 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Sending and Receiving of Operator Messages CHECKING THE SENDING AND RECEIVING OF OPERATOR MESSAGES ................................................................. Operator messaging enables operators to send video displayed in one or more panels or the whole salvo layout to other operators and digital monitors. Comments can be included in the message sent to operators. The comments are not included when the message is send to digital monitors. The received messages can be viewed in the Messages window. The number of new messages appears in the blinking mode in the status bar. For example, Messages(3) in green color indicates three new messages. The following figure illustrates the Messages window. Figure 5-8 Note: 316 Messages window For more information on how to send and receive messages, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Surrounding Cameras Feature CHECKING THE SURROUNDING CAMERAS FEATURE ................................................................. A camera can be associated to a group of cameras using the surrounding cameras feature. This feature enables operators to view video from a group of related cameras at the same time. For example, video from cameras located in the same area. Note: For more information on how to associate camera and how to view video from a group of related cameras, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 317 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Saving the Salvo Layout using the Salvo View Feature CHECKING THE SAVING THE SALVO LAYOUT USING THE SALVO VIEW FEATURE ................................................................. A salvo layout that is customized based on the preferences of the operators is referred to as a salvo view. Cameras and sequences that are selected frequently and the preferred salvo layout can be saved as a salvo view. The saved salvo views appear in the Views window. Note: 318 For more information on how to create, select, and manage salvo views, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Device Listing in My Devices Window CHECKING THE DEVICE LISTING IN MY DEVICES WINDOW ................................................................. In the My Devices window, operators can group the video sources, which are frequently selected such as cameras, monitors, and sequences. If you group the video sources, it is easy to select and you need not search in the Devices window, which generally consists of many video sources. You can also group the devices under shared devices. Devices grouped under shared devices are displayed on all client workstations irrespective of the logged in user. The following figure illustrates My Devices window. Figure 5-9 Note: My Devices window For more information on how to add a video source to My Devices window and how to create folders to group them, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 319 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Search for Recorded Video CHECKING THE SEARCH FOR RECORDED VIDEO ................................................................. Operators can search for recorded video, events, bookmarks from cameras connected to the recorders. The Search tab looks similar to the following figure. Figure 5-10 Note: 320 Search tab For more information on how to search for recorded video, clips and bookmarks and how to play the search results, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Generation of Event History and Operator Log Report CHECKING THE GENERATION OF EVENT HISTORY AND OPERATOR LOG REPORT ................................................................. Two types of reports, namely event history report and operator log report, can be generated. The event history report can be generated for cameras, monitors, recorders, and switchers. The event history report lists the events related to a device during a time period. For example, for a camera, you can generate the event history report to know the occurrence of events like enabling of camera motion detection, starting of background recording, and others. The operator log report can be generated to view the activities performed by users. The operator log report lists the activities performed by users during a time period. For example, creating clips, adding bookmarks, sending messages and other actions performed by a user. You can generate reports from the Report tab. The following figure illustrates the Report tab. Figure 5-11 Note: Report tab For more information on how to generate and view the reports, refer to the MAXPRO VMS R310 Help. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 321 5 VE R I F Y I N G T H E C O N F I G U RA T I O N O F M A X P R O V M S Checking the Generation of Event History and Operator Log Report This page is intentionally left blank 322 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 6 UPGRADING TO MAXPRO VMS R310 ..... ................................... OVERVIEW ................................................................. This chapter describes a common procedure for upgrading MAXPRO VMS software from: • R300 Build 185 to R310 • R300 Build 188 to R310 • R300 SP1 to R310 • R300 SP2 to R310 The upgrade procedure is same for all the patches that are released on top of R300 SP1 and SP2. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • Ensure that the client and server computers meet the software requirements. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 323 6 UP GRA DI NG TO M AXPR O VM S R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R300 TO MAXPRO VMS R310 ................................................................. See the instructions in the following sections to upgrade to MAXPRO VMS R300. BEFORE YOU BEGIN 1. Stop Trinity Services. a. Choose Start>Run, and then type services.msc. The Services window appears. b. Right-click TrinityContoller, and then select Stop. c. Right-click TrinityServer, and then select Stop. 2. Stop the recorder Services if you have any recorder client or server installed. a. Choose Start>Run, and then type services.msc. The Services window appears. b. Right-click IP Engine Logger, and then select Stop. The Stop Other Services dialog box appears. c. Click Yes. 3. Update the firewall configuration to allow SQL Server and SQL Express connections. Caution: For upgrading recorder driver from the MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310, please ensure that your computer has Internet Explorer version 7.0 or later. 324 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . UP GRA DING TO MA XPRO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 To upgrade to MAXPRO VMS R310 1. Insert the MAXPRO VMS R310 DVD in the DVD drive. The setup runs automatically. If the setup does not run automatically, browse to the setup folder on the DVD and doubleclick Setup. exe. Note A confirmation message is displayed to disable the Automatic Windows updates as shown below. Click Yes to disable and proceed. The Welcome dialog box appears. Figure 6-1 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Welcome 325 6 UP GRA DI NG TO M AXPR O VM S R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 2. Click Next. The Validation of User Credentials dialog box appears Figure 6-2 3. In the Domain Name/Host Name list, type the domain name or host name if you know it or select one from the list. 4. In the User Name box, type your Windows user name. 5. In the Password box, type your Windows password. 6. Select the Enable Auto Logon check box if you want the computer to reboot on its own whenever required, during the installation process. Note 326 Validation of User Credentials You are prompted to reboot multiple times while upgrading to MAXPRO VMS R310, auto log on avoids manual intervention during multiple reboots. A confirmation message is displayed as shown below. Click Yes to continue. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . UP GRA DING TO MA XPRO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 7. Click Next. The Features to be upgraded dialog box appears. Figure 6-3 Features to be upgraded 8. The check boxes for the features to be upgraded are selected by default. Select the new features you want to install by clicking the respective check boxes. Note: • • Clear the check boxes for the features that you do not want to install/upgrade. While upgrading the recorder driver, the message “ Are you sure you want to remove the Kinley Client” appears. Click OK to proceed with the recorder 400.3 upgrade installation. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 327 6 UP GRA DI NG TO M AXPR O VM S R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 9. Click Next. The Choose Cache file location dialog box appears. Figure 6-4 Choose Cache File Location 10. Click Next. Step 9 is required only if Analytics is selected in the Features to be upgraded dialog box. 11. Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Figure 6-5 328 Start Copying Files MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide . . . . . UP GRA DING TO MA XPRO VMS R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R300 to MAXPRO VMS R310 Note A confirmation message is displayed as shown below. Click Yes to proceed and to install the list of prerequisites. 12. Click Next. The set up status of various components appears. After the components are installed/upgraded successfully, the Upgrade Complete dialog box appears. Figure 6-6 Upgrade Complete 13. Click Finish. You are prompted to reboot the computer to complete installation. Figure 6-7 Prompt for Rebooting 14. Click OK. MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide 329 6 UP GRA DI NG TO M AXPR O VM S R310 Upgrading MAXPRO VMS R240 To MAXPRO VMS R300 UPGRADING MAXPRO VMS R240 TO MAXPRO VMS R300 ................................................................. Refer to MAXPRO VMS R300 Commissioning and Installation Guide to upgrade VMS R240 To MAXPRO VMS R300. 330 MAXPRO VMS R310 Commissioning and Installation Guide Honeywell Video Systems (Head Office) 2700 Blankenbaker Pkwy, Suite 150 Louisville, KY 40299, USA www.honeywellvideo.com +1.800.796.2288 Honeywell Video Systems Northern Europe Netwerk 121 1446 WV Purmerend, The Netherlands www.honeywell.com/security/nl +31.299.410.200 Honeywell Security Australia Pty Ltd. Unit 5, Riverside Centre, 24-28 River Road West Parramatta, NSW 2150, Australia www.honeywellsecurity.com/au +61.2.8837.9300 Honeywell Systems Group Aston Fields Road, Whitehouse Ind Est Runcorn, Cheshire, WA7 3DL, UK www.honeywell.com/security/uk +44 (0)1928 756999 Honeywell Security Asia Pacific 33/F Tower A, City Center, 100 Zun Yi Road Shanghai 200051, China www.asia.security.honeywell.com +86 21.2527.4568 Honeywell Security South Africa Unit 6 Galaxy Park, 17 Galaxy Avenue Linbro Park, P.O. Box 59904 2100 Kengray, Johannesburg, South Africa www.honeywell.co.za +27.11.574.2500 Honeywell Security Asia Flat A, 16/F, CDW Building, 388 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan, N.T., Hong Kong www.asia.security.honeywell.com +852.2405.2323 Honeywell Security France Parc Gutenberg, 8, Voie La Cardon 91120, Palaiseau, France www.honeywell.com/security/fr +33.01.64.53.80.40 Honeywell Security Italia SpA Via Treviso 2 / 4 31020 San Vendemiano Treviso, Italy www.honeywell.com/security/it +39.04.38.36.51 Honeywell Security España Mijancas 1. 3a Planta P.Ind. Las Mercedes 28022 Madrid, Spain www.honeywell.com/security/es +34.902. 667.800 Honeywell Security Deutschland Johannes-Mauthe-Straße 14 D-72458 Albstadt, Germany www.security.honeywell.com/de +49.74 31.8 01.0 Honeywell Security Poland Chmielewskiego 22a, 70-028 Szczecin, Polska www.ultrak.pl +48.91.485.40.60 Honeywell Security Czech Republic Havránkova 33, Brno Dolní Heršpice, 619 00, Czech Republic www.olympo.cz +420.543.558.111 Honeywell Security Slovakia Republic Vajnorská 142, 83104 Bratislava Slovakia www.olympo.sk +421.2.444.54.660 www.honeywellvideo.com [email protected] Document 800-20433-A – 02/2015 © 2015 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without written permission from Honeywell Video Systems. The information in this publication is believed to be accurate in all respects. However, Honeywell Video Systems cannot assume responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use thereof. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Revisions or new editions to this publication may be issued to incorporate such changes.